<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Special:Contributions/Marycooch"/>
	<updated>2026-05-11T17:49:58Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=New_features&amp;diff=120751</id>
		<title>New features</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=New_features&amp;diff=120751"/>
		<updated>2016-05-23T14:23:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: French link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{About Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle 2.9 brings together features and enhancements developed by our core team and community contributors. These include: streamlined navigation, useful improvements to activities such as Lesson and Quiz, along with  new admin settings which  refine the course management process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read on for Moodle 2.9 highlights, or watch the screencasts on the official [https://youtu.be/JsUz1DMg-24?list=PLxcO_MFWQBDclJEctfdxCFeo8QuyR1Hw_ Moodle HQ YouTube page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full details of the release, with technical information, can be found in the [[:dev:Moodle 2.9 release notes|Moodle 2.9 release notes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== For all users ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;contentblock&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestDashboard.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;My home is now Dashboard&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;My home has been renamed to Dashboard, while retaining its full functionality as before. Where courses have assignments, these are only now displayed in the [[Course overview block]] when they need attention from the teacher (grading) or the student (submitting/resubmitting). [[Dashboard|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grades29.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;New Grades page&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The user menu now includes a new Grades page which display grades from all courses users are students in, with links to the relevant user reports. Courses users are teaching in are also displayed, with links to the relevant course gradebook. [[Overview report|Read more...]] &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;contentblock&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestProfile2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;New Profile page&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Accessed from the user menu, the new Profile page provides quick links to blog entries, forum post, badges and, depending on the user’s privileges,  a variety of reports including a new [[Browser sessions|browser sessions page.]] The page includes links formerly in the Navigation block. [[User profiles|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestBrowsersessions.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Browser sessions page&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A new page displays your current browser sessions allowing you to check if you forgot to log off on a different computer (and log off now)  and reassure yourself nobody is using your account.  [[Browser sessions| Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;contentblock&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestPreferences2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;New Preferences page&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;AlI your preferences can easily be reviewed and altered from one page, accessed from the user menu. Easily change your choice of editor, update your forum notifications, change your password and more. This page includes settings formerly in the Administration block. [[Preferences|Read more...]] &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestMessages.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Improved messaging&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A messages button on profile pages enables you to send messages via pop-up box without leaving the page you are on. [[Messaging|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;contentblock&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestAttoDrag.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Drag and drop into Atto&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;It&#039;s now possible to drag and drop images directly into the Atto editor, for example when editing a course summary or when posting in a forum. [[Text editor|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestSearch.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Search Server files&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Users with permissions to access Server files can now use a search facility, allowing for easy location of files in other courses they have access to. [[Server files|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity enhancements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestLesson.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Lesson&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Along with enhancements such as group support, user and group overrides better logging and improved essay grading interface, the [[Lesson|lesson]] activity now boasts a new completion condition “Require time spent”. [[Lesson settings|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestQuiz2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt; Quiz&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; [[Quiz|Quizzes]] can now have section headings and questions can be shuffled on different pages. It is now possible to require that a particular question be answered before a subsequent one may be accessed, and quizzes along with responses and feedback will now display attractively when printed from the browser. [[Building Quiz|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TesForumGroup.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Easily post to all groups in a forum&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; If your [[Forum|forum]] has groups, you only need to post once and your post is copied for each group.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestDatabase.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt; Extra options for Database and Glossary&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; Along with displaying user pictures in the [[Database activity module|database]], you can set certain fields as &#039;required&#039;. When importing [[Glossary|glossary]] entries, embedded images and attached files will also be included.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestActivityResultsBlock.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Activity results&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; As well as displaying quiz results in competitive league table style, a new Activity results block can show scores from any graded or rated activity in your course. [[Activity results block|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestGradetopass.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt; Grade to pass&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; If you are using graded activities it is now possible to set a passing grade during the activity set up process instead of having to edit the gradebook directly.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course management===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestDelete.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Delete course sections&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A new option in each course section allows you to completely remove the section and its content, regardless of where the section is located on your course page. [[Course homepage|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestCohortsync.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt; Faster addition of cohorts and meta linked courses&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; You can enrol many cohorts or multiple courses with the [[Cohort sync|cohort sync]] and [[Course meta link|course meta link]] methods much faster now with a new &amp;quot;Add method and create another&amp;quot; button. Users from linked courses can also be synced into a group; a much voted-for feature.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestKeyholder.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Keyholder&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; A new capability [[Capabilities/enrol/self:holdkey|enrol/self:holdkey]] will make it easy for certain members of your organisation - not necessarily teachers- to be the keyholder to self-enrolled courses. [[Keyholder|Read more...]] &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New options for administrators and developers===&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;ul class=&amp;quot;thumbnails&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TemplateLibrary.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;New template library for renderers&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A new element library will make it easier to create and style the user interface, give Moodle a more consistent look and feel and improve site performance. [[dev:Render_library_specification|Read more...]] &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;li class=&amp;quot;span6&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;thumbnail&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TestFileType.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;caption&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Add custom file types&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
            &amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A new admin tool lists all existing file types and allows you to add new ones specific to programs your organisation might be using. This will make the display of such file types clearer and downloading them less confusing. [[Working with files|Read more...]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
          &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:New features|Category:New features]] - list of pages documenting new features in Moodle 2.9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Nuevas características de Moodle 2.9]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Neue Funktionalitäten]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Nouveautés de Moodle 2.9]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_backup&amp;diff=120593</id>
		<title>Course backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_backup&amp;diff=120593"/>
		<updated>2016-03-01T13:44:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removed ref to experimental backup as no longer relevant&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Backup}}&lt;br /&gt;
A course can be saved with some or all of its parts by using the course backup.  Typically, the site administrator will set a schedule of [[Automated course backup|automated course backups]] for the whole site.  A teacher with editing privileges can create a backup or download an existing backup for safe keeping, or for use on another Moodle site.  See the screencast  [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BVHHC-wBhEM Course backup: Save and reuse your course] for information on how to back up your course as a teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backing up a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To backup a course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Backup&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Initial settings - Select activities, blocks, filters and other items as required then click the Next button. Users with appropriate permissions, such as administrators and managers, can choose whether to [[Backup of user data|include users]], anonymize user information, or include user role assignments, user files, comments, user completion details, course logs and grade history in the backup. &#039;&#039;&#039;New in 2.9&#039;&#039;&#039;: Groups and Groupings may be included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:backupgroups.png|thumb|center|Backup settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Schema settings  - Select/deselect specific items to include in backup, then click the Next button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If desired, select specific types of activity to be backed up by clicking the link &#039;Show type options&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26backuprestore1.png|thumb|Back up screen with option to select all or none]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26backuprestore2.png|thumb|Back up screen with option to select activity types]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Confirmation and review - Check that everything is as required, using the Previous button if necessary, otherwise click the &#039;Perform backup&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
* Complete - Click the Continue button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A backup file (with distinctive .mbz extension to avoid confusion with .zip files) is then saved in the course backup area. Backup file names are of the form &#039;&#039;backup-moodle2-course-coursename-date-hour.mbz&#039;&#039;, ending in &#039;&#039;-nu.mbz&#039;&#039; when backed up with no users and &#039;&#039;-an.mbz&#039;&#039;  with anonymized names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quick backup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are satisfied with the default settings and don&#039;t wish to go through all the backup screens, you can simply click &#039;Jump to final step&#039; to perform the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:jumptofinalstep.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Anonymizing user information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anonymize user information is a backup feature which &amp;quot;protects user identities&amp;quot; by making each user anonymous. If this box is checked in the backup initial settings, Moodle will substitute aliases for real names, substituting @doesntexist.com email addresses and so forth. For example  &amp;quot;Max Manager&amp;quot; might become  &amp;quot;anonfirstname4 anonlastname4&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backup and restore of assignments from Moodle 2.2 and older==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The assignment activity module was completely rewritten in Moodle 2.3. Thus, assignments from Moodle 2.2 and older (e.g. from Moodle 1.9) need to be upgraded in order to continue being usable. See the section &#039;Restoring course backups from Moodle 2.2 and older&#039; in [[Assignment upgrade tool]] for details of what to do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CLI backup script==&lt;br /&gt;
Performs via command line a backup of the given course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options===&lt;br /&gt;
* --courseid=INTEGER (Course ID for backup.)&lt;br /&gt;
* --courseshortname=STRING (Course shortname for backup.)&lt;br /&gt;
* --destination=STRING (Path where to store backup file. If not set the backup will be stored within the course backup file area.)&lt;br /&gt;
* -h, --help (Print out this help.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Example===&lt;br /&gt;
\$sudo -u www-data /usr/bin/php admin/cli/backup.php --courseid=2 --destination=/moodle/backup/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
* Lose content after a restore in Moodle 2.0 ?  Do you see topic headings that say &amp;quot;Orphaned activities&amp;quot;?   Solution: Go to course settings and increase the number of topic sections and things will return to normal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creative uses==&lt;br /&gt;
The backup and restore processes can offer the teacher and administrators many creative solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
*Duplicating courses or specific activities in one course to another course (similar to Import)&lt;br /&gt;
*Updating a production Moodle site course, with material from a localhost site course&lt;br /&gt;
*Transferring a course to a new Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
*In earlier versions of Moodle, a way of rolling a course forward without past student activity&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a blank activity, save just that activity and then restore it to the course or another course one or more times. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General backup defaults==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default settings for course backups can be set by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Backups &amp;gt; General backup defaults&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selected settings may be locked, so that they cannot be changed when creating a course backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting a time in the &amp;quot;Keep logs for..&amp;quot;  dropdown, it is possible to specify how long backup  logs information is kept before being deleted. As this information may be very large, it is recommended the length of time chosen be quite short.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course backup capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:anonymise|Anonymise user data on backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backupcourse|Backup courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backupsection|Backup sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backuptargethub|Backup for hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backuptargetimport|Backup for import]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:configure|Configure backup options]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:downloadfile|Download files from backup areas]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:userinfo|Backup user data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*Forum post [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=310227#p1241735 Back up via command line]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course restore]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Backup of user data]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Activity backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurssicherung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Respaldo del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_Segurtasun-kopia]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Sauvegarde de cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コースバックアップ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Moodle_video_tutorials&amp;diff=120589</id>
		<title>Moodle video tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Moodle_video_tutorials&amp;diff=120589"/>
		<updated>2016-02-29T10:07:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Video tutorials in English */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;There are a large number of free online video tutorials about Moodle and this page collates them for Moodle 2. If you have made some Moodle 2 video tutorials or have a link to some free Moodle 2 video tutorials, please add them here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Video tutorials in English==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eATTzWUrK1s What is Moodle? Simple, short explainer video by HowToMoodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/moodlehq Videos made by Moodle HQ]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.com/6-instructional-video-sites-for-moodle-users/ 6 Instructional Video Sites for Moodle Users: ]&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/user/moodlehq Moodle HQ YouTube channel] &#039;&#039;&#039;Learn Moodle&#039;&#039;&#039;: The twice-yearly MOOC includes basic video tutorials for  the recent and latest versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://mistreamnet.org/videos/list?utf8=?&amp;amp;search=Moodle+Moot  Mi Stream – MoodleMoot Michigan] Hosted in Mid-Michigan at the beginning of the year, the past recordings of the MoodleMoot has some interesting insight into creative uses of Moodle and shared experiences.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCPJxOKUfOwIZ4uS6i7H65Vw Synergy Learning] UK Moodle Partner, Synergy Learning, has announced their new Youtube channel. While there are only a handful of videos at present, watch this space in 2015 for more resources to appear on this site.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/user/LambdaSolutionsInc Lambda Solutions] Lambda Solutions is a full service Moodle Partner offering services in both US and Canada. Their channel offers experiences and demonstrations of Moodle to provide a good overview for users.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCsLt8oYvDYGpSHcGhRBBkyw Nellie Deutsch] Dr. Nellie Deutsch is faculty at Atlantic University in the MA transpersonal and leadership studies. Her channel offers a bevy of Moodle how-tos and elearning best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/HRDNZMoodlePartner Videos made by HRDNZ]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.webanywhere.co.uk/video/training-videos Videos made by Webanywhere]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Video tutorials in other languages==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtube.com/Moodle2Ourlearning  video tutorials in French/en Français]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle manuals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle presentations]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tutoriales de Moodle en video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Moodle_video_tutorials&amp;diff=120588</id>
		<title>Moodle video tutorials</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Moodle_video_tutorials&amp;diff=120588"/>
		<updated>2016-02-29T10:07:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Video tutorials in English */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;There are a large number of free online video tutorials about Moodle and this page collates them for Moodle 2. If you have made some Moodle 2 video tutorials or have a link to some free Moodle 2 video tutorials, please add them here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Video tutorials in English==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eATTzWUrK1s What is Moodle? Simple, short explainer video by HowToMoodle]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/moodlehq Videos made by Moodle HQ]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.com/6-instructional-video-sites-for-moodle-users/ 6 Instructional Video Sites for Moodle Users: ]&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/user/moodlehq Moodle HQ YouTube channel] &#039;&#039;&#039;Learn Moodle&#039;&#039;&#039;: The twice-yearly MOOC includes basic video tutorials for  the recent and latest versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/user/moodlehq Pukunui YouTube channel] Australasian Moodle Partner, Pukunui, runs the annual iMoot online and provides Moodle services to a range of industry sectors. Their channel offers recordings from past events and helpful how-to videos.&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://mistreamnet.org/videos/list?utf8=?&amp;amp;search=Moodle+Moot  Mi Stream – MoodleMoot Michigan] Hosted in Mid-Michigan at the beginning of the year, the past recordings of the MoodleMoot has some interesting insight into creative uses of Moodle and shared experiences.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCPJxOKUfOwIZ4uS6i7H65Vw Synergy Learning] UK Moodle Partner, Synergy Learning, has announced their new Youtube channel. While there are only a handful of videos at present, watch this space in 2015 for more resources to appear on this site.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/user/LambdaSolutionsInc Lambda Solutions] Lambda Solutions is a full service Moodle Partner offering services in both US and Canada. Their channel offers experiences and demonstrations of Moodle to provide a good overview for users.&lt;br /&gt;
**[https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCsLt8oYvDYGpSHcGhRBBkyw Nellie Deutsch] Dr. Nellie Deutsch is faculty at Atlantic University in the MA transpersonal and leadership studies. Her channel offers a bevy of Moodle how-tos and elearning best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/HRDNZMoodlePartner Videos made by HRDNZ]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.webanywhere.co.uk/video/training-videos Videos made by Webanywhere]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Video tutorials in other languages==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtube.com/Moodle2Ourlearning  video tutorials in French/en Français]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle manuals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle presentations]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tutoriales de Moodle en video]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Rubrics&amp;diff=120523</id>
		<title>Rubrics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Rubrics&amp;diff=120523"/>
		<updated>2016-01-22T12:20:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 3.0 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Advanced grading methods}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gradingform-rubric-icon.png]] &#039;&#039;&#039;Rubrics&#039;&#039;&#039; are [[Advanced grading methods|advanced grading forms]] used for criteria-based assessment. The rubric consists of a set of criteria. For each criterion, several descriptive levels are provided. A numerical grade is assigned to each of these levels. The rater chooses which level answers/describes the given criterion best. The raw rubric score is calculated as a sum of all criteria grades. The final grade is calculated by comparing the actual score with the worst/best possible score that could be received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rubric editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gradingfrom-rubric-editor.png|thumb|right|Rubric editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rubric editor is available via the advanced grading method management screen which in turn is available via the &#039;Advanced grading&#039; link in the activity settings block. The editor lets you set the rubric form name, the description and the rubric itself. The editor lets you add new criteria and levels, delete them and change the criteria order. There are several rubric options that can be configured, too. For each criterion, the criterion description should be filled. For each level, the level definition and the number of points associated with the level should be specified. Neither the criterion description nor the level definition text fields support embedded images yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rubric definition must be saved using either &#039;Save rubric and make it ready&#039; or &#039;Save as draft&#039; button. The button sets the form definition status respectively as described at the [[Advanced grading methods]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Hint:&#039;&#039; You can modify the effective weight of a criterion by setting the value of the points assigned to its levels. If there is one criterion with levels 0, 1, 2, 3 and the second one with levels 0, 2, 4, 6 then the later one&#039;s impact on the final grade is twice as much as the first one&#039;s.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Hint:&#039;&#039; Use the Tab key to jump to the next level/criteria and even to add new criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the rubric ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:gradingfrom-rubric-usage.png|thumb|right|Filling the rubric to assess a submission in the Assignment module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When teachers use the rubric to assess some student&#039;s work, they select the level describing the student&#039;s performance best for each criterion. Currently selected levels are highlighted in light green. If the rubric filling is re-edited later, the previously selected level is highlighted in light red. A level must be selected for each criterion, otherwise the rubric is not validated by the server as the final grade can&#039;t be calculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the form definition allows it, an optional remark can be filled for each criterion providing a detailed feedback/explanation of the assessment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Grade calculation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rubric normalized score (ie basically a percentage grade) is calculated as&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;G_s = \frac{\sum_{i=1}^N (g_i - min_i) }{\sum_{i=1}^N (max_i - min_i)}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: where &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;g_i \in \mathbb{N}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the number of points given to the i-th criterion, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;min_i \in \mathbb{N}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the minimal possible number of points for of the i-th criterion, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;max_i \in \mathbb{N}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the maximal possible number of points for the i-th criterion and &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;N \in \mathbb{N} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the number of criteria in the rubric.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a single criterion can be: &#039;&#039;Overall quality of the paper&#039;&#039; with the levels &#039;&#039;5 - An excellent paper&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;3 - A mediocre paper&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;0 - A weak paper&#039;&#039; (the number represent the number of points).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039; let us have an assessment form with two criteria, which both have four levels 1, 2, 3, 4. The teacher chooses level with 2 points for the first criterion and 3 points for the second criterion. Then the normalized score is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;G_s = \frac{(2 - 1) + (3 - 1)}{(4 - 1) + (4 - 1)} = \frac{3}{6} = 50 %&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this calculation may be different from how you intuitively use rubric. For example, when the teacher in the previous example chose both levels with 1 point, the plain sum would be 2 points. But that is actually the lowest possible score so it maps to the grade 0 in Moodle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TIP: &#039;&#039;&#039;To avoid confusion from this sort of thing, we recommend including a level with 0 points in every rubric criterion.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student&#039;s score is calculated by subtracting the minimum score available on the rubric from the student&#039;s actual score achieved on the rubric, and dividing the resulting answer by the difference between the maximum and minimum score available&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How students access the rubric==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:rubricbeforesubmission.png|thumb|How students view a rubric]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When students click on an assignment which has a rubric  attached to it, they will see the rubric as part of the information about their assignment. Thus, they can see the rubric before they submit.&lt;br /&gt;
==How teachers access the rubric==&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will see the rubric when they click &#039;View/grade all submissions&#039; and access the work of a particular student. They don&#039;t by default see the rubric on the grading page before grading. If you wish to allow teachers to see the rubric, then the site administrator must set the capabililty [[Capabilities/mod/assign:submit|mod/assign:submit]] to &#039;Allow&#039; for the editing teacher role in that assignment (or sitewide if really necessary). &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; This then has the side effect of the teacher appearing in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do you go to edit a rubric?===&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a rubric go to&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Assignment Administration &amp;gt; Advanced grading &amp;gt; Define Rubric&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;Rubric&#039; from Change active grading method to drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
You can see your created rubric with three options above Edit the current form definition, Delete the currently defined form, Publish the form as a new template. Click &amp;quot;Edit the current form definition&amp;quot; to edit your predefined rubric form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do you choose another rubric for an assignment?===&lt;br /&gt;
From &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Assignment administration&amp;gt;Advanced grading&#039;&#039; access your rubric and delete it. The see #5 in [[Advanced grading methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why are total grades coming out strange?===&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s likely that the lowest total grade in your rubric is not zero.  In this case your rubric grades from RUBRIC MIN to RUBRIC MAX are being converted to the assignment grades of ZERO to ASSIGNMENT MAX, which is probably what you don&#039;t want.  To fix this, just make sure you have a ZERO level in each of your rubric criteria (even if you never use them).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://school.demo.moodle.net/grade/grading/form/rubric/preview.php?areaid=33 School demo example of student view of rubric] (Log in as username &#039;&#039;&#039;student&#039;&#039;&#039;/password &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://school.demo.moodle.net/mod/assign/view.php?id=205&amp;amp;rownum=1&amp;amp;action=grade School demo example of teacher view of rubric in student assignment] (Log in as username &#039;&#039;&#039;teacher&#039;&#039;&#039;/password &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/KXavtUhDINA A first look at rubrics] Screencast&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced grading methods]] page for general concepts of advanced grading in Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rubric_(academic) Rubric description] at Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://school.discoveryeducation.com/schrockguide/assess.html Examples of Assessment Rubrics] at Kathy Schrock&#039;s Guide for Educators&lt;br /&gt;
* http://rubistar.4teachers.org/ - a free tool to help teachers create quality rubrics&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://digiteacher.wordpress.com/2014/11/20/my-teacher-is-a-zombie-marking-by-rubric-on-moodle/ My Teacher is a Zombie – Marking by Rubric on Moodle] Using an electronic rubric frees up the time to ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Rubriken]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Rúbricas]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=120502</id>
		<title>Using RSS feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=120502"/>
		<updated>2016-01-10T09:45:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RSS feeds}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Activities and other areas that produce RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subscribing to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To subscribe to an RSS feed from Moodle, click on the activity and look in the Administration block for a link &amp;quot;RSS feeds for (this activity)&amp;quot;  and copy the address from your browser bar to your RSS reader software.&lt;br /&gt;
.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting access to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure security and privacy, RSS feed URLs contain a special token that identifies the user they are for. This prevents users from accessing areas of Moodle they shouldn&#039;t have access to via RSS feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users have this token automatically created for them the first time they access an area of Moodle that produces an RSS feed. If a user feels that their RSS feed token has been compromised in some way they can request a new one by going to the User menu &amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Preferences &amp;gt; Security keys&#039;&#039; and clicking the Reset link next to the RSS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To provide a public RSS feed for use on another site, login to your Moodle site as a guest, then copy the RSS feed address. &lt;br /&gt;
Important to use this function on an other site, guest users do not have to accept any &amp;quot;Site policy URL for guests&amp;quot; in site policies options. --[[User:Arnould Olivier|Arnould Olivier]] ([[User talk:Arnould Olivier|talk]]) 21:28, 11 October 2015 (AWST)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Zx9o-ueJ-II Moodle 2.0 - RSS]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:RSS-Feeds nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_FAQ&amp;diff=120495</id>
		<title>Course completion FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_FAQ&amp;diff=120495"/>
		<updated>2016-01-08T08:19:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: badge enrolment plugin&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Course completion}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable course completion?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Course completion settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Students have completed the criteria but the report does not show it==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Scheduled tasks&#039;&#039; that the task &#039;Calculate completion data&#039; is running frequently enough, such as every minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I have set up course prerequisites but my students can still access the second course before they have finished the first==&lt;br /&gt;
Sorry - the course prerequisites feature does NOT prevent students from accessing courses. It merely prevents the course from being marked as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot; until they have completed another course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent my students accessing course 2 before they have completed course 1?==&lt;br /&gt;
This is currently not possible using completion settings- see MDL-22648 .The usual workaround is to add a final activity at the end of course 1 - such as a quiz - inside which you give the enrolment key to the next course (in the quiz feedback for example) Thus, only those who have completed course 1 can get access to course 2. That doesn&#039;t stop them sharing the key however, but you could see any cheaters in the logs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another workaround is to install the [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/enrol_badgeenrol Badge enrolment plugin] which restricts access to a second course until the student has obtained a badge in the first course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I made a mistake and had to erase my student data. Do my students have to redo the activities?==&lt;br /&gt;
No. For example, if you set the course completion for All aggregation methods and wanted to reset it to &amp;quot;Any&amp;quot;, Moodle will warn you that you are deleting compiled student data. It will delete the student data only for the course completion information.  When cron.php runs it will recompile the course completion information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My student got an error message when they click on more information in the course completion block==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This may happen at the start of the course when the student has not completed an activity and/or you have selected an aggregation method of All and have not checked off that they have completed the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where do my students tell me they have finished the course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Did you install the [[Self completion block]]?   When they click on the link in that block, that will indicate they think they are done. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set my course completion to be longer than 30 days after enrolment?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the dropdown menu only allows you to choose from up to 30 days after enrolment. There is a tracker entry about this here MDL-34678. However, if you are happy editing the database then you can manually change the value as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Look in the mdl_course_completion_criteria table. The Duration After Enrolment criteria will have the &amp;quot;criteriatype&amp;quot; value of 5 and the number of days is recorded in the column &amp;quot;enrolperiod&amp;quot; in seconds (so #days x 86400). &lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the enrolperiod value and after the next cron run everything will use the new value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=194747 How to set course completion requirements to include a minimum quiz grade?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kursabschluss FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Finalización del curso FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_settings&amp;diff=120494</id>
		<title>Course completion settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_settings&amp;diff=120494"/>
		<updated>2016-01-07T08:54:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removed fixed issue&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Course completion}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling course completion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enable course completion for the site by ticking the &#039;Enable completion tracking&#039; checkbox in  &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can then enable course completion for their course by setting &#039;Enable completion tracking&#039; to Yes in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;. (This also enables the use of [[Activity completion]].) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;Course completion&#039; link will then be shown under Course administration in the Administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course completion settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursecompletiongeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here how you wish to mark the course complete -whether you want &#039;&#039;Any&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;All&#039;&#039; of the requirements that follow to count towards completion.&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition:Activity completion===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:activitycompletion25.png|thumb|Activity completion settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the boxes of the activities you wish to count towards completion of the course. (You need to have [[Activity completion]] enabled to be able to do this. You can decide whether ALL of the activities must be completed or ANY one of them.&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition:Completion of other courses===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:noothercoursecompletion25.png|thumb|Settings when no other courses have course completion enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:othercoursesompletion25.png|thumb|Settings when course completion is enabled in one or more other courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to make &amp;quot;the completion of another course&amp;quot; as a condition for completing the course you are currently working in. This does not block the student from your current course; it simply means that the current course will not be marked complete until the first course has been marked complete. Thus, completion of the current course is dependent upon completion of an earlier course.  Just select one or more courses in the &amp;quot;Courses available box&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Date===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:completiondate25.png|thumb|Date settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick the &#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039; box you can then set a date after which the course will be declared complete.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Enrolment duration===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:completionenrolment25.png|thumb|Enrolment duration settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick the &#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039; box you can then choose a  number of days after enrolment upon which the course will be marked complete.&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Unenrolment===&lt;br /&gt;
(This  one setting is collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick &amp;quot;Enable&amp;quot; here then the course will be marked complete once the student is unenrolled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Course grade===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:completioncoursegrade25.png|thumb|Course grades settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick the &#039;&#039;Enable&#039;&#039; box, you can set a passing grade for the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Manual self-completion===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:manualselfcompletion25.png|thumb|Manual self completion settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is enabled then a student can mark the course complete themselves from the [[Self completion block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Condition: Manual completion  by others===&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:manualcompletionothers25.png|thumb|Manual completion by others settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Users with selected roles may mark the course as complete if their role is ticked here. The roles listed are ones for which the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:markcomplete|Mark users as complete in course completion]] is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ALL means that each role must mark the course complete before; ANY means that it will be classed as complete once one role has marked it complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Completion tracking must be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features &amp;gt; Enable completion tracking&#039;&#039; (check enabled) in order to allow completion tracking on your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set Completion tracking as On or Off in new courses as a course default in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course completion capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two capabilities, both of which are allowed for the default roles of manager, teacher and non-editing teacher:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/report/completion:view|View course completion report]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/course:markcomplete|Mark users as complete in course completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course completion blocks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Course completion status block]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Self completion block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaro-osaketaren_jarraipenaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de finalización del curso]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=120493</id>
		<title>Forum settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=120493"/>
		<updated>2016-01-06T09:00:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: groups and single simple discussion&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can add a Forum activity in a course when editing is turned on by clicking an &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and selecting Forum.&lt;br /&gt;
==Activity settings==&lt;br /&gt;
To see all the settings expanded, click the link &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the Forum a name (which students see on the course page) and a description if required. (For the Single simple discussion forum type, your description must include the question or topic you wish to discuss.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking the question mark icon [[File:helppopup.png]]next to any setting you don&#039;t understand will display extra help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attachments and word count===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum file size that may be attached to a forum post depends on the Moodle site settings. The teacher may want a smaller size limit for the forum and should bear in mind the download speeds of the course participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;Display word count&amp;quot;  is enabled, then the number of words in forum posts will be shown at the bottom of each post.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum subscriptions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is subscribed to a forum it means that they will receive notification (depending on the user’s messaging settings preferences) of each new posting. By default, posts are recorded about 30 minutes after the post was first written. Depending upon the email settings of each forum member, they may be notified immediately after the 30 minute edit window is closed, or in a batch at a time fixed by the site administrator (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People can usually choose whether or not they want to be subscribed to each forum. However, the teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum then all course users will be subscribed automatically, even those that enrol at a later time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subscription mode and subscribe or unsubscribe links appear in&#039;&#039; Navigation&amp;gt;Forum administration&#039;&#039; when viewing the forum.  Teachers can quickly change the mode via the &#039;Subscription mode&#039; options and view the current subscribers via the &#039;Show/edit current subscribers&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Forcing everyone to subscribe is especially useful in the news forum and in forums towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).&lt;br /&gt;
* Changing the setting from &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; will not unsubscribe existing users; it will only affect those who enrol in the course in the future. Similarly changing &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; will not subscribe existing course users but only those enrolling later.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is also a &amp;quot;Subscriptions not allowed&amp;quot; setting which prevents Students from subscribing to a Forum. Teachers may choose to subscribe to a forum if they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Subscribe to individual forum discussions====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a forum with optional or auto subscription you can choose which discussions to subscribe to by clicking the &#039;dot&#039; icon to the right of the discussion. An envelope tells you are already subscribed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumsubscribe.png|thumb|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you reply to a post you will see a tickbox &#039;Discussion subscription&#039;. It will already be ticked if you have chosen in your forum preferences to be subscribed to discussions you post in by default. If you have chosen not to subscribe to forum discussions by default, then you can tick this box to be notified of posts from this particular thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS===&lt;br /&gt;
If [[RSS feeds]] are enabled for the site and for forums, then an expandable section for RSS settings will appear. Here the teacher can turn RSS feeds on or off for that forum.When set to “Discussions,” the RSS feed will send out new discussions to subscribers. When set to “Posts,” the RSS feed will send out any new posts to subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cron must be working regularly for the RSS feed to work; otherwise participants will see &#039; Error reading RSS data&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Blocking posts===&lt;br /&gt;
By default, course participants can post any number of messages to forums. If you want to restrict this number and block them after a certain number or time, the expandable section &#039;Post threshold for blocking&#039; allows you to specify your choice. You can also send a warning that they are about to be blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade and Ratings===&lt;br /&gt;
Forums use a rating [[Scales|scale]] which you can customise. You can also set a &amp;quot;Grade to pass&amp;quot; which  may be connected with [[Activity completion]] and [[Conditional activities]] such that a student will not be able to access a follow up activity until they have obtained a required grade (rating) in the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only teachers can rate forum posts, though students can be given permission to do so if desired (see forum permissions below). This is a useful tool for giving students participation grades. Any ratings given in the forum are recorded in the [[Gradebook|gradebook]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set an &#039;aggregate type&#039;  to decide how all the ratings given to posts in a forum are combined to form the final grade (for each post and for the whole forum activity). See [[Ratings]] for an explanation of aggregate types and which one is best for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on what is enabled for your site and course, you may also need to explore [[Common  module settings]], [[Conditional activities| Restrict access]] and [[Activity completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Forum activity doesn&#039;t display as you wish, check the site settings below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using groups with Forums===&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;Group mode&#039; in the expandable Common module settings section allows you to specify how your forum works with groups. Note that Single simple discussion forum types cannot be used with groups as this feature is not implemented. For more information about using groups with forums, see the documentation [[Using Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;group mode&#039;&#039;&#039; setting has three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A description for the Forum may or may not be obligatory depending on  &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Common settings,&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The forum module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039; and, for &#039;Maximum time to edit posts&#039;, in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changing the subject line of forum notifications===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Normally when forum subscribers receive emails from forums, the subject line is of the form: Course short name + Subject of post:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forum1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subject line can be changed - for example to: Course short name + Forum name + Subject by going to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Language&amp;gt;Language customisation&#039;&#039; and in forum.php changing the string &#039;&#039;postmailsubject&#039;&#039; to &lt;br /&gt;
 {$a-&amp;gt;courseshortname} {$a-&amp;gt;forumname} {$a-&amp;gt;subject}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forum2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:フォーラムの追加/編集]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del foro]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Security_keys&amp;diff=120491</id>
		<title>Security keys</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Security_keys&amp;diff=120491"/>
		<updated>2016-01-04T10:50:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Secure RSS feeds */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RSS feeds}}&lt;br /&gt;
A security key or token enables other systems to access Moodle securely. A security key may be used for secure RSS feeds or web services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user can obtain a security key via  the Preferences link in the user menu top right and entering the key in an external application accessing Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At any time, a user can reset their key by clicking the reset link. A new different key is automatically generate which will then need to be entered in the external application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; The security keys page can not generate web service keys/tokens for admins. Admins can create a token manually from the administration block: &#039;&#039; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Web services &amp;gt; Manage tokens&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Secure RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secure RSS feeds are a way you can read [[Using_RSS_feeds|forum posts, blog entries, etc]] while you are offline, and without having to log in.  For example, if you want to read the posts in a forum, you usually need to log in to Moodle.  But if your site administrator has [[RSS_feeds_settings|enabled RSS]], these posts are available as a feed you can subscribe to with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comparison_of_feed_aggregators feed reader], and you can read entries even when you don&#039;t have access to the Internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secure RSS feeds allow your feed reader, which usually expects feeds to be publicly available, to download material from Moodle without having to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you are viewing an activity that provides an RSS feed, look in the Administration block for a link labelled &amp;quot;RSS feed of posts&amp;quot;.  This link is unique to your Moodle account.  Paste it into your feed reader to have it obtain new entries for you automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you ever think your RSS feed token has been compromised in some way, e.g. you have lost a mobile phone that subscribed to a news forum, you can request a new one by clicking the &#039;&#039;Reset&#039;&#039; link on the &#039;&#039;Security Keys&#039;&#039; page accessed from the Preferences link in you user menu. This will disable the old feed token and generate a new one.  You can then visit the activities you wish to subscribe to and copy the URL, which will contain your new security key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Web Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:セキュリティキー]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Claves de seguridad]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Security_keys&amp;diff=120490</id>
		<title>Security keys</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Security_keys&amp;diff=120490"/>
		<updated>2016-01-04T10:48:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: security keys&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RSS feeds}}&lt;br /&gt;
A security key or token enables other systems to access Moodle securely. A security key may be used for secure RSS feeds or web services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user can obtain a security key via  the Preferences link in the user menu top right and entering the key in an external application accessing Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At any time, a user can reset their key by clicking the reset link. A new different key is automatically generate which will then need to be entered in the external application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; The security keys page can not generate web service keys/tokens for admins. Admins can create a token manually from the administration block: &#039;&#039; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Web services &amp;gt; Manage tokens&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Secure RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secure RSS feeds are a way you can read [[Using_RSS_feeds|forum posts, blog entries, etc]] while you are offline, and without having to log in.  For example, if you want to read the posts in a forum, you usually need to log in to Moodle.  But if your site administrator has [[RSS_feeds_settings|enabled RSS]], these posts are available as a feed you can subscribe to with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comparison_of_feed_aggregators feed reader], and you can read entries even when you don&#039;t have access to the Internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Secure RSS feeds allow your feed reader, which usually expects feeds to be publicly available, to download material from Moodle without having to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whenever you are viewing an activity that provides an RSS feed, look in the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; block for a link labelled &amp;quot;RSS feed of posts&amp;quot;.  This link is unique to your Moodle account.  Paste it into your feed reader to have it obtain new entries for you automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you ever think your RSS feed token has been compromised in some way, e.g. you have lost a mobile phone that subscribed to a news forum, you can request a new one by clicking the &#039;&#039;Reset&#039;&#039; link on the &#039;&#039;Security Keys&#039;&#039; page in your Moodle profile.  This will disable the old feed token and generate a new one.  You can then visit the activities you wish to subscribe to and copy the URL, which will contain your new security key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Web Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:セキュリティキー]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Claves de seguridad]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=User_pictures&amp;diff=120459</id>
		<title>User pictures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=User_pictures&amp;diff=120459"/>
		<updated>2015-12-17T16:38:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: changed Settings to Administration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Accounts}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Example.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing all user pictures==&lt;br /&gt;
*An administrator can do a quick check of the user pictures by typing in the browser http://www.YOURMOODLESITE.com/userpix when logged in as admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Updating user pictures ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can update their picture by editing their user profile in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; My profile &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;. (The site administrator can disable this ability in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user&#039;s picture is usually displayed next to the user&#039;s name.  For example,  next to content they have has posted in a forum, or in a participant list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a default image that is used by the Moodle site.  The site administrator can change the default picture for the site by replacing the F1 and F2 images in the theme folder &#039;&#039;&#039;/theme/&#039;&#039;themename&#039;&#039;/pix_core/u/&#039;&#039;&#039; or in the core folder &#039;&#039;&#039;/pix/u/&#039;&#039;&#039;. Remember to refresh your browser [Ctrl + F5] to see any picture changes!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a delete box when checked will delete the picture when the profile is saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a browse button for the user to find and upload a picture file.   &lt;br /&gt;
* The upload image will be reduced and saved in two files of 100px by 100px and 35px by 35px. &lt;br /&gt;
* The picture description appears when the mouse rolls over the picture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tip: If you want the default picture to be blank, then replace it with a 1px x 1px transparent spacer image with the same filename. It can be either a &#039;.png&#039; or &#039;.gif&#039; file extension.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading user pictures in bulk==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can upload a zip file containing user images in &#039;&#039;Adminisrtration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Upload user pictures&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Uploaduserpictures.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The image files should be named after the username, the idnumber or the id of the student (along with the correct image file extension.) For example, a student with the username &#039;&#039;jbrown98&#039;&#039; would have a picture called &#039;&#039;jbrown98.jpg&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Image types supported include gif, jpg, and png.&lt;br /&gt;
*Image file names are not case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gravatars==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enable the use of gravatars in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; User policies&#039;&#039;. If a user has not uploaded a user picture, Moodle will check whether the user&#039;s email address has an associated gravatar and if so, will use the gravatar as the user&#039;s picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also (for 2.3.3 onwards) Gravatar default image URLs in [[Roles settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141378 Cannot upload or change profile pictures] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Erabiltzailearen_irudiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Imágenes de usuarios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Image des utilisateurs]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Nutzerbilder]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Language_FAQ&amp;diff=120447</id>
		<title>Language FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Language_FAQ&amp;diff=120447"/>
		<updated>2015-12-09T13:34:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: MoodleCloud customising language&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which is the official language for Moodle? ===&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://lang.moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2617 &amp;quot;official&amp;quot;] language for Moodle is actually the Australian English (&#039;&#039;hey mate!&#039;&#039;) , which in 100% the same as UK English. The default language on a new installation of Moodle, unless you change it, will be this version of English, denoted by the language code &amp;quot;en&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What do codes like &amp;quot;en&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;en_us&amp;quot;  or &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;es_mx&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;es_ve&amp;quot; mean?? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the language codes for each language. There is a standard for these, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes ISO language code list].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second part, &amp;quot;_us&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;_mx&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;_ve&amp;quot; for example, represent localisations of the main language for a particular country or dialect. Typically these will include variant spellings and other preferred local terminology and phrasing. So &amp;quot;es_mx&amp;quot; has spellings and idioms (and a very important [[Decimal separator]]) used in Mexican Spanish which are distinct from international Spanish. The es_ve has small differences from the international spanish that are of significance to Moodle users in Venezuela.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;en_us&amp;quot; is the English - United States language pack; &amp;quot;en&amp;quot; is Australian English, which is practically the same as British English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I found a mistake or typo in a language pack. Or my language is only partial, much of it is still English. What do I do? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language packs have maintainers and Moodle has its own language translation toolkit, known as AMOS. Other than some core languages maintained by Moodle HQ, most languages are maintained by volunteer maintainers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_FAQ Translation FAQ page] for how to report issues and [https://lang.moodle.org/mod/page/view.php?id=9 the AMOS for newcomers page] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Language  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Where can I set the default language for the site? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; [[Language settings]]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note you can only choose to set as default a Language pack that is already installed. If the language you want is not on the list, you will need to install the language pack first. See [[Language packs]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== When I change to a new default language, users still have the old language. ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Correct. When you change to a new site default language, this does not update the language setting in the profile for already existing users. It only sets a new default for new user accounts you create from now on. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do updates for already existing users, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tell users how to change it themselves in their user profiles&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the [[Upload users]] tool to do a mass update&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have access to the database, you can change this with a simple query. See [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/ad-hoc_contributed_reports#List_of_users_with_language here for an example] of how to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I&#039;ve set a default site language but when I log in it switches to English. Why? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Moodle detects a user&#039;s language from their browser setting. This language auto-detection may be disabled so that the default site language is used instead in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; [[Language settings]]&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I&#039;ve set a default site language, but the Moodle calendar is in English. Why? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your Moodle calendar is not translated, then the string &#039;locale&#039; (for *nix servers) or the string &#039;localewin&#039; (for Windows servers) in the &#039;langconfig.php&#039; file is wrong (or your server is not configured to support the language). There are quite a few languages that are not supported by Windows servers and the localewin server can not be set. In that case, you have to run your Moodle on a *nix server to make the translation of your Moodle calendar work. See [[:dev:Translation_langconfig]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I disable (hide) the language dropdown menu on the site front page? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language settings&#039;&#039; and un-tick the &#039;Display language menu&#039; checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because it is a customisation, Moodle will not erase the xx_local language files in Moodledata with an upgrade.   Moodle will upgrade any language folders it finds in the moodle/lang folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Language Customisation and Multi-language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I change a word or phrase used in Moodle? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language customisation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Language customisation]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I find where a language string is located? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &#039;Show origin of languages strings&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Debugging&#039;&#039; then visit the page containing the string you want to customise. Add to the URL of the page &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?strings=1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or if it doesn&#039;t work try &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;strings=1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;) then reload the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Why are my changes not saved in my MoodleCloud site?===&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately customising language strings is not supported in MoodleCloud. (The same string cache is used for  for all sites and is read-only.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why are my changes not saved if I edit a language pack with the Moodle language pack editor? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This could be caused by the caching on the server. Language strings are cached into server memory for performance reasons and when you save changes, they may not be immediately picked up. First, refresh your own browser cache to refresh the pages from the site. Then if the strings are still not there, an administrator can purge the cache of the server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I provide course content in more than one language?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels, web pages, activity descriptions etc. may be provided in more than one language using the [[Multi language content|Multi language content filter]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I provide course headings in more than one language?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the multi language content filter to apply to content AND headings in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Filters &amp;gt; Manage filters&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any short cuts for editing a language?===&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, but be careful.  You can make use of the customise language process.  Basically copy the php files that contain the strings you want to change to the moodledata/lang/local folder.   For example, copy the /lang/en/moodle.php file to someplace.  Edit the file with a search and replace with whole word and case sensitive turned on, change Teacher to Instructor and Teachers to Instructors, do the same for teacher and teachers.  Now copy that saved copy of the moodle.php file to the  moodledata/lang/en_local folder.   Be careful not to change the String name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is it possible to customise language strings per theme?===&lt;br /&gt;
Not by default, as when strings are customised, they are customised for the whole site. However, it is possible to make a new language  pack based on your main language and apply that pack to the course which has the theme. See this forum post for more information: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220671&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Language Questions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Will installing several language packs decrease my server performance?===&lt;br /&gt;
Installing many (20+) language packs have [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=241098 almost 0 impact] on Moodle performance. A copy of the language packs installed are stored in your site&#039;s local /mooodledata directory. Also, actively used language strings are cached in memory by your server as well to help performance, so as long as your server has sufficient RAM there will be no impact from having many language packs installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What is this Pirate version of English doing on my site? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has become something of a custom in the Moodle community over the years to observe [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Talk_Like_a_Pirate_Day &#039;Talk Like a Pirate Day&#039;] (September 19th) by temporarily changing the language of a site to allow the the English - Pirate (en_ar) language pack. See the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=132888 here] for more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lang pack download failed with &#039;HTTP response code: HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found&#039; after new release ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After we branch for a new release, Moodle will try and download the new version of lang packs, however for a while development is on-sync and no new language string differences will be introduced between the two branches. During this period, AMOS is not branched and so Moodle will fail to download new language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is expected and it will be resolved once AMOS is opened up for new changes in the new version. See MDL-34028 for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=26 Languages forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131927#p604462 Edited Strings Not Visible]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=316623#unread Months names in Arabic language pack]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ de langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sprache FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Idioma FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120446</id>
		<title>Portfolios</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120446"/>
		<updated>2015-12-07T16:02:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: emoved confusing ref&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios in Moodle make it easy for a student to export their work to an external portfolio.  For example, student work might include forum posts or assignment submissions that they believe demonstrates their knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios are disabled by default in Moodle and must be enabled by a site administrator. See [[Managing portfolios]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Box portfolio|Box]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File download]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Flickr.com portfolio|Flickr.com]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Google Drive portfolio|Google Drive]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Picasa portfolio|Picasa]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mahara portfolio|Mahara ePortfolio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolios FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When portfolios are enabled, forum posts and other exportable data (see below) have an export to portfolio icon or link beside them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To export a forum post to a portfolio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Export to portfolio&#039; link&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the portfolio you wish to export to e.g. Google Docs or file download (this step will be skipped if there&#039;s only one)&lt;br /&gt;
# If prompted, select an export format e.g. HTML&lt;br /&gt;
# If file download was selected in step 2, you can then save the file, otherwise you will be given the option to return to the page you were previously viewing or visit your portfolio (certain portfolios only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Forum post for export.png|thumb|1. Forum post for export]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select destination.png|thumb|2. Selecting the export destination]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select format.png|thumb|3. Selecting an export format]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Items which may be exported to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Assignment submissions - single and multiple file uploads&lt;br /&gt;
* Chat sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activity module entries (##export## tag may be added to list and single templates)&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
* Glossary entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible export formats include&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:LEAP2A_Portfolio_Implementation|LEAP2A]], a specification for e-portfolio portability&lt;br /&gt;
* Images&lt;br /&gt;
* Text&lt;br /&gt;
* File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing your own portfolios==&lt;br /&gt;
While the administrator determines which portfolios are enabled on the site in [[Managing portfolios]], an individual user can choose which portfolios to display or hide from the preferences page of the user menu top right, in the section &amp;quot;Portfolios.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exabis e-portfolio block]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio Plugin for Evernote]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ic2j6esjPR8 Portfolios in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electronic_portfolio e-Portfolio] overview at Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Portafolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Portfolioak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Portfolios]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120445</id>
		<title>Portfolios</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120445"/>
		<updated>2015-12-07T15:19:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updated settings&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios in Moodle make it easy for a student to export their work to an external portfolio.  For example, student work might include forum posts or assignment submissions that they believe demonstrates their knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios are disabled by default in Moodle and must be enabled by a site administrator. See [[Managing portfolios]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Box portfolio|Box]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File download]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Flickr.com portfolio|Flickr.com]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Google Drive portfolio|Google Drive]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Picasa portfolio|Picasa]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mahara portfolio|Mahara ePortfolio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolios FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When portfolios are enabled, forum posts and other exportable data (see below) have an export to portfolio icon or link beside them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To export a forum post to a portfolio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Export to portfolio&#039; link&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the portfolio you wish to export to e.g. Google Docs or file download (this step will be skipped if there&#039;s only one)&lt;br /&gt;
# If prompted, select an export format e.g. HTML&lt;br /&gt;
# If file download was selected in step 2, you can then save the file, otherwise you will be given the option to return to the page you were previously viewing or visit your portfolio (certain portfolios only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Forum post for export.png|thumb|1. Forum post for export]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select destination.png|thumb|2. Selecting the export destination]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select format.png|thumb|3. Selecting an export format]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Items which may be exported to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Assignment submissions - single and multiple file uploads&lt;br /&gt;
* Chat sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activity module entries (##export## tag may be added to list and single templates)&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
* Glossary entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible export formats include&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:LEAP2A_Portfolio_Implementation|LEAP2A]], a specification for e-portfolio portability&lt;br /&gt;
* Images&lt;br /&gt;
* Text&lt;br /&gt;
* File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PDF is available for File Download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing your own portfolios==&lt;br /&gt;
While the administrator determines which portfolios are enabled on the site in [[Managing portfolios]], an individual user can choose which portfolios to display or hide from the preferences page of the user menu top right, in the section &amp;quot;Portfolios.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exabis e-portfolio block]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio Plugin for Evernote]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ic2j6esjPR8 Portfolios in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electronic_portfolio e-Portfolio] overview at Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Portafolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Portfolioak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Portfolios]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120444</id>
		<title>Portfolios</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Portfolios&amp;diff=120444"/>
		<updated>2015-12-07T15:14:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: pdf file download&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing content}}&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios in Moodle make it easy for a student to export their work to an external portfolio.  For example, student work might include forum posts or assignment submissions that they believe demonstrates their knowledge. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Portfolios are disabled by default in Moodle and must be enabled by a site administrator. See [[Managing portfolios]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Box portfolio|Box]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File download]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Flickr.com portfolio|Flickr.com]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Google Drive portfolio|Google Drive]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Picasa portfolio|Picasa]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Mahara portfolio|Mahara ePortfolio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolios FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When portfolios are enabled, forum posts and other exportable data (see below) have an export to portfolio icon or link beside them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To export a forum post to a portfolio&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Export to portfolio&#039; link&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the portfolio you wish to export to e.g. Google Docs or file download (this step will be skipped if there&#039;s only one)&lt;br /&gt;
# If prompted, select an export format e.g. HTML&lt;br /&gt;
# If file download was selected in step 2, you can then save the file, otherwise you will be given the option to return to the page you were previously viewing or visit your portfolio (certain portfolios only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Forum post for export.png|thumb|1. Forum post for export]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select destination.png|thumb|2. Selecting the export destination]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Portfolio export select format.png|thumb|3. Selecting an export format]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Items which may be exported to portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Assignment submissions - single and multiple file uploads&lt;br /&gt;
* Chat sessions&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activity module entries (##export## tag may be added to list and single templates)&lt;br /&gt;
* Database activities&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
* Glossary entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible export formats include&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:LEAP2A_Portfolio_Implementation|LEAP2A]], a specification for e-portfolio portability&lt;br /&gt;
* Images&lt;br /&gt;
* Text&lt;br /&gt;
* File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PDF is available for File Download.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing your own portfolios==&lt;br /&gt;
While the administrator determines which portfolios are enabled on the site in [[Managing portfolios]], an individual user can choose which portfolios to display or hide from &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;My profile settings&amp;gt;Portfolios&amp;gt;Configure&#039;&#039; and can see the record of all items exported from &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;My profile settings&amp;gt;Portfolios&amp;gt;Transfer logs&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:portfoliosettingsprofile.png|thumb|Managing your own portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:transferlogs.png|thumb|Viewing the record of exports to portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Exabis e-portfolio block]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolio Plugin for Evernote]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ic2j6esjPR8 Portfolios in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electronic_portfolio e-Portfolio] overview at Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Portafolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Portfolioak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Portfolios]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/site:uploadusers&amp;diff=120421</id>
		<title>Capabilities/moodle/site:uploadusers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/site:uploadusers&amp;diff=120421"/>
		<updated>2015-11-24T10:26:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Capabilities}}&lt;br /&gt;
*This allows a user to [[Upload users|upload users]] via text file in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Upload users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*This capability is allowed for the default manager role only&lt;br /&gt;
*This capability can only be applied in the system context i.e. via a system role&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Capabilities|Site]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Capabilities/moodle/site:uploadusers]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Participation_report&amp;diff=120416</id>
		<title>Participation report</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Participation_report&amp;diff=120416"/>
		<updated>2015-11-23T11:39:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removed resolved tracker issue&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Course reports}}&lt;br /&gt;
A participation report for a particular activity can be generated by a manager, teacher or non-editing teacher (or any other user with the capability [[Capabilities/report/participation:view|report/participation:view]]) in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt;  Reports &amp;gt; Course participation&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Participation_report_example.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The definition of View and Post for the selected activity type will be given on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
*Forum View: View Discussion, Search, Forum, Forums, Subscribers&lt;br /&gt;
*Forum Post: Add Discussion, Add Post, Delete Discussion, Delete Post, Move Discussion, Prune Post, Update Post&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An extremely useful feature of the participation report is the option to send a message to all students who have not completed a certain action.  Other options with selected users are to add a note or extend enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If a [[Using_Forum#Moving_a_discussion|forum post is moved]], the participation report will show incorrect results for the affected forums. For example, take a student who posted in forum A and had their post moved to forum B. In the course participation report the student will still be listed has having made a post in forum A, but will not be listed as having made a post yet in forum B.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Reporte de participación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Rapport de participation]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kursbeteiligung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120392</id>
		<title>Talk:Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120392"/>
		<updated>2015-11-18T09:40:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: reply to German&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Hi German&lt;br /&gt;
Just thinking this page might be better in the developer docs. Would you like to move it there or shall I? (Also thinking about the 3.0 documentation)&lt;br /&gt;
--[[User:Mary Cooch|Mary Cooch]] ([[User talk:Mary Cooch|talk]]) 22:05, 17 November 2015 (AWST)&lt;br /&gt;
Hi Mary&lt;br /&gt;
Please go ahead and move it yourself, as long as all pages that linked to it will still be linked to the new location. [[User:German Valero|German Valero]] ([[User talk:German Valero|talk]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hi German - hopefully this should do it. --[[User:Mary Cooch|Mary Cooch]] ([[User talk:Mary Cooch|talk]]) 17:40, 18 November 2015 (AWST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120391</id>
		<title>Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120391"/>
		<updated>2015-11-18T09:39:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: redirecting&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[dev:Decimal separator]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120390</id>
		<title>Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120390"/>
		<updated>2015-11-18T09:29:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: moved page WIP&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page has now been moved to the Developer documentation: [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Decimal_separator Decimal separator]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=120389</id>
		<title>Forum FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=120389"/>
		<updated>2015-11-18T09:06:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: I meant copied from 3.0 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I easily see which posts I have read and not read?==&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the user menu (top right) and select &#039;Preferences&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;Forum preferences&#039; and for &#039;Forum tracking&#039; select: &#039;&#039;Yes; highlight new posts for me&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Unread posts will now display on your [[Dashboard]] and in a forum itself you will be see which posts are read and unread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumtracking2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are students unable to post in the forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the forum is a [[News forum]] i.e. a special forum for general announcements which is automatically created for each course, and which by default only teachers and administrators can post in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a standard forum in which students can post, turn editing on for the course, click the &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link and then choose Forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students may also be unable to post to a forum where a [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] other than &#039;No Groups&#039; has been used but the student is not a member of any group in the course.  They will see the message &amp;quot;Adding discussions to this forum requires group membership&amp;quot;.  In this case, either add the student to a [[Groups|group]] or change the [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] to &#039;No Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable students to rate forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I have a &#039;Like&#039; button for my forum discussions?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Scales&#039;&#039; add a new scale with just one item. This could be &#039;Like&#039; or it could be &#039;Useful&#039; for example.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable ratings in your forum and if you want students to &#039;like&#039; the posts, in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumlike.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not get ratings to work on my forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you have followed the instructions above correctly and still cannot see ratings, then check you have json support enabled on your server. You can see this in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Server&amp;gt;PHP info.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Json.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also this discussion:[ http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=170563]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I create a teacher-only forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher/tutor-only forum may be added to a course by creating a hidden forum. Teachers are able to view hidden course activities whereas students cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My users can&#039;t add attachments to my forum, either with drag and drop or with the file picker.==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check that in the forum settings that you have changed the maximum number of attachments allowed to a number greater than 0 ;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the news forum from a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the news forum from the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; set &amp;quot;News items to show&amp;quot; to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the Latest news block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove test messages from a new forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several options ([https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95470#p421687 Here is a nice graphic]).  Remember you can &lt;br /&gt;
*Move the discussion/thread to another forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Edit the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Split the thread at a particular post and move it to another thread &lt;br /&gt;
*Split&amp;gt;move&amp;gt;delete your test messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a display period for news forum announcements?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed posts are disabled by default, but the feature can be enabled by checking the &#039;&#039;forum_enabletimedposts&#039;&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally managers and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are email copies of forum posts not being sent?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the cron is not set up. Please refer to the [[Cron|cron instructions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Try the default settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039;. This generally works.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure that &#039;Allow user to select character set&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039; is set to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable guests to post in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s not possible to enable guests to post in a forum, though there is a workaround. Please see [[Forum poster role]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I close/archive a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You might want to do this if, for example, you want to put an end to a student discussion topic but still want them to be able to see posts which had been made without being able to reply any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilites &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forum-permissions-page1.gif|thumb|The screen and relevant capabilities. (Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are a teacher in a course, you should be able to do this by default, but if you don&#039;t see these options, ask your admin to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the teacher role and change the capability moodle/role:safeoverride to allow&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the tab &amp;quot;Allow role overrides&amp;quot; (in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the appropriate box(s) in the teacher row to set which role(s) they can override. Most likely it will just be the student role, so check the box where the teacher row intersects with the student column&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make a single thread read only, you need a forum which has already been closed/archived. Move the the thread to this read-only forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I quarantine a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a student makes an inappropriate post, rather than deleting it, you can &amp;quot;quarantine&amp;quot; it by sending it to a hidden forum and then alerting your superior and the child&#039;s guardians. To do this you first need to create a forum &amp;quot;Hidden forum for Offensive Posts&amp;quot; (for example) and hide it with its eye.&lt;br /&gt;
**Find the offensive post and click &#039;split&#039; (between &#039;edit&#039; and &#039;delete&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
**This will take you to a second page where you will be asked to verify the split. Confirm it by pressing the &#039;split&#039; button near the top of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
**The post(s) will now be split. You should see the post/discussion individually on a separate page. In the right-hand corner will be a dropdown bar and a button that says &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
**Choose &#039;Hidden Forum for Offensive Posts&#039; in the dropdown and click &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you inform the child why their post has been quarantined, as well as your superior and the child&#039;s guardians.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
(with thanks to Ben Reynolds)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I set up forum moderation or an approval process before a post appears?==&lt;br /&gt;
Not in core Moodle.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Check out the tracker item https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10440&lt;br /&gt;
*And https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB-2260&lt;br /&gt;
*If anyone discovers a plugin to allow this, please post details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I subscribe to just one discussion in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. Please see [[Forum settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I receive forum emails in digest form?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A daily digest of either complete forum posts or with subjects only can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow students to add new questions in a Q &amp;amp; A forum type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only teachers and managers by default see the &amp;quot;add  a new question&amp;quot; button. If you wish students to be able to add new questions, they need to be given the capability [[Capabilities/mod/forum:addquestion|mod/forum:addquestion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make sure my students are notified of forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For students to be notified of forum posts, they need to be &#039;&#039;subscribed&#039;&#039; to the forum. A teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum either initially (auto subscription) or permanently (forced subscription) using the subscription mode setting. See the section on subscription mode in [[Forum settings]] for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can also subscribe selected students to the forum via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Show/edit current subscribers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications sent via email?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the words &amp;quot;Site news&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the words to something else from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; but to have no words at all - and without touching the code - do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*As admin go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;HTML settings&#039;&#039; and uncheck/untick &#039;&#039;Remove HTML tags from all activity names&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;lt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; (for the site news) and type:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sitenewsname.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Save. What this does is code a space into the name field so Moodle thinks there is something in the required field -  but that something is a space,  not words.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have different email digests for different forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is possible, although there is not currently a setting for it. In the course you wish to manage the daily digests, type into your browser &#039;&#039;http://YOURMOODLESITE/mod/forum/index.php?id=2&#039;&#039;  (where &#039;&#039;YOURMOODLESITE&#039;&#039; is your Moodle and  the &#039;&#039;=number&#039;&#039; is the course ID) This will bring you to the index page of all your subscribed forums and you can specify how you want to receive notifications from there.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26forumdigest.png|thumb|Per forum digest settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher see all of a student&#039;s forum posts in a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher clicks on the profile of a particular student, for example via the Participants link, they can then access a link &#039;&#039;Forum posts&#039;&#039; from the Navigation block. Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started by that student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a user see all their forum posts on Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
A user can view all their forum posts by going to the Navigation block and clicking &#039;&#039;My profile&amp;gt;Forum posts.&#039;&#039; Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:seeallforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove a rating from a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not currently possible to remove a rating which might have been made by mistake or by malice. However, if a certain poster gives inappropriate ratings on a regular basis, it is possible to create a custom system role preventing them from rating posts and applying this role to the specified posters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=116 Forum module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=148055 Ability to post anonymously]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=178331 How to resend forum posts] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196698 Discussion Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur le forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Foro FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=120388</id>
		<title>Forum FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=120388"/>
		<updated>2015-11-18T09:06:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.9 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I easily see which posts I have read and not read?==&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the user menu top right and select &#039;Preferences&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;Forum preferences&#039; and for &#039;Forum tracking&#039; select: &#039;&#039;Yes; highlight new posts for me&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Unread posts will now display on your [[Dashboard]] and in a forum itself you will be see which posts are read and unread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumtracking2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are students unable to post in the forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the forum is a [[News forum]] i.e. a special forum for general announcements which is automatically created for each course, and which by default only teachers and administrators can post in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a standard forum in which students can post, turn editing on for the course, click the &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link and then choose Forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students may also be unable to post to a forum where a [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] other than &#039;No Groups&#039; has been used but the student is not a member of any group in the course.  They will see the message &amp;quot;Adding discussions to this forum requires group membership&amp;quot;.  In this case, either add the student to a [[Groups|group]] or change the [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] to &#039;No Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable students to rate forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I have a &#039;Like&#039; button for my forum discussions?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Grades&amp;gt;Scales&#039;&#039; add a new scale with just one item. This could be &#039;Like&#039; or it could be &#039;Useful&#039; for example.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable ratings in your forum and if you want students to &#039;like&#039; the posts, in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumlike.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not get ratings to work on my forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you have followed the instructions above correctly and still cannot see ratings, then check you have json support enabled on your server. You can see this in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Server&amp;gt;PHP info.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Json.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also this discussion:[ http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=170563]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I create a teacher-only forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher/tutor-only forum may be added to a course by creating a hidden forum. Teachers are able to view hidden course activities whereas students cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My users can&#039;t add attachments to my forum, either with drag and drop or with the file picker.==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check that in the forum settings that you have changed the maximum number of attachments allowed to a number greater than 0 ;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the news forum from a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the news forum from the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; set &amp;quot;News items to show&amp;quot; to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the Latest news block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove test messages from a new forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several options ([https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95470#p421687 Here is a nice graphic]).  Remember you can &lt;br /&gt;
*Move the discussion/thread to another forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Edit the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Split the thread at a particular post and move it to another thread &lt;br /&gt;
*Split&amp;gt;move&amp;gt;delete your test messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a display period for news forum announcements?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed posts are disabled by default, but the feature can be enabled by checking the &#039;&#039;forum_enabletimedposts&#039;&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally managers and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are email copies of forum posts not being sent?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the cron is not set up. Please refer to the [[Cron|cron instructions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Try the default settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039;. This generally works.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure that &#039;Allow user to select character set&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039; is set to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable guests to post in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s not possible to enable guests to post in a forum, though there is a workaround. Please see [[Forum poster role]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I close/archive a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You might want to do this if, for example, you want to put an end to a student discussion topic but still want them to be able to see posts which had been made without being able to reply any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilites &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forum-permissions-page1.gif|thumb|The screen and relevant capabilities. (Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are a teacher in a course, you should be able to do this by default, but if you don&#039;t see these options, ask your admin to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the teacher role and change the capability moodle/role:safeoverride to allow&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the tab &amp;quot;Allow role overrides&amp;quot; (in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the appropriate box(s) in the teacher row to set which role(s) they can override. Most likely it will just be the student role, so check the box where the teacher row intersects with the student column&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make a single thread read only, you need a forum which has already been closed/archived. Move the the thread to this read-only forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I quarantine a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a student makes an inappropriate post, rather than deleting it, you can &amp;quot;quarantine&amp;quot; it by sending it to a hidden forum and then alerting your superior and the child&#039;s guardians. To do this you first need to create a forum &amp;quot;Hidden forum for Offensive Posts&amp;quot; (for example) and hide it with its eye.&lt;br /&gt;
**Find the offensive post and click &#039;split&#039; (between &#039;edit&#039; and &#039;delete&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
**This will take you to a second page where you will be asked to verify the split. Confirm it by pressing the &#039;split&#039; button near the top of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
**The post(s) will now be split. You should see the post/discussion individually on a separate page. In the right-hand corner will be a dropdown bar and a button that says &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
**Choose &#039;Hidden Forum for Offensive Posts&#039; in the dropdown and click &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you inform the child why their post has been quarantined, as well as your superior and the child&#039;s guardians.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
(with thanks to Ben Reynolds)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I set up forum moderation or an approval process before a post appears?==&lt;br /&gt;
Not in core Moodle.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Check out the tracker item https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB/component/10440&lt;br /&gt;
*And https://tracker.moodle.org/browse/CONTRIB-2260&lt;br /&gt;
*If anyone discovers a plugin to allow this, please post details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I subscribe to just one discussion in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. Please see [[Forum settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I receive forum emails in digest form?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A daily digest of either complete forum posts or with subjects only can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow students to add new questions in a Q &amp;amp; A forum type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only teachers and managers by default see the &amp;quot;add  a new question&amp;quot; button. If you wish students to be able to add new questions, they need to be given the capability [[Capabilities/mod/forum:addquestion|mod/forum:addquestion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make sure my students are notified of forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For students to be notified of forum posts, they need to be &#039;&#039;subscribed&#039;&#039; to the forum. A teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum either initially (auto subscription) or permanently (forced subscription) using the subscription mode setting. See the section on subscription mode in [[Forum settings]] for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can also subscribe selected students to the forum via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Show/edit current subscribers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications sent via email?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the words &amp;quot;Site news&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the words to something else from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; but to have no words at all - and without touching the code - do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*As admin go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;HTML settings&#039;&#039; and uncheck/untick &#039;&#039;Remove HTML tags from all activity names&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;lt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; (for the site news) and type:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sitenewsname.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Save. What this does is code a space into the name field so Moodle thinks there is something in the required field -  but that something is a space,  not words.&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have different email digests for different forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is possible, although there is not currently a setting for it. In the course you wish to manage the daily digests, type into your browser &#039;&#039;http://YOURMOODLESITE/mod/forum/index.php?id=2&#039;&#039;  (where &#039;&#039;YOURMOODLESITE&#039;&#039; is your Moodle and  the &#039;&#039;=number&#039;&#039; is the course ID) This will bring you to the index page of all your subscribed forums and you can specify how you want to receive notifications from there.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26forumdigest.png|thumb|Per forum digest settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher see all of a student&#039;s forum posts in a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher clicks on the profile of a particular student, for example via the Participants link, they can then access a link &#039;&#039;Forum posts&#039;&#039; from the Navigation block. Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started by that student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a user see all their forum posts on Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
A user can view all their forum posts by going to the Navigation block and clicking &#039;&#039;My profile&amp;gt;Forum posts.&#039;&#039; Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:seeallforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove a rating from a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not currently possible to remove a rating which might have been made by mistake or by malice. However, if a certain poster gives inappropriate ratings on a regular basis, it is possible to create a custom system role preventing them from rating posts and applying this role to the specified posters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=116 Forum module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=148055 Ability to post anonymously]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=178331 How to resend forum posts] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196698 Discussion Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur le forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Foro FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120379</id>
		<title>Talk:Decimal separator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Decimal_separator&amp;diff=120379"/>
		<updated>2015-11-17T14:05:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: comment about moving page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Hi German&lt;br /&gt;
Just thinking this page might be better in the developer docs. Would you like to move it there or shall I? (Also thinking about the 3.0 documentation)&lt;br /&gt;
--[[User:Mary Cooch|Mary Cooch]] ([[User talk:Mary Cooch|talk]]) 22:05, 17 November 2015 (AWST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=120378</id>
		<title>Quiz FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=120378"/>
		<updated>2015-11-17T13:29:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Workarounds for allowing guests to see a quiz */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I randomly generate a quiz from a larger question bank?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are various ways to answer this:&lt;br /&gt;
# You can&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won&#039;t accidentally miss questions.&lt;br /&gt;
# OK, so you want us to write code that won&#039;t let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like &amp;quot;asdf&amp;quot; into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link &amp;quot;group override&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student&#039;s attempts and can give the student credit for them by hand. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students answers would then get graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a nice way to print a copy of a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Yes - use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other printing options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.academic-moodle-cooperation.org Academic Moodle Cooperation] of the University of Vienna and the Vienna University of Technology have contributed the [[mod/offlinequiz/mod| Offline quiz activity]] for Moodle 2.6, available from the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_offlinequiz Moodle plugins database] (Moodle 2.2 and 2.5 versions are available via Github, and a 2.8 version will probably appear soon). This MC Offline quiz module (mod/offlinequiz) adds paper-and-pencil multiple-choice quizzes to Moodle. In offline quizzes students mark answers to questions on a sheet of paper (the answer form).  &lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://github.com/bumoodle/moodle-quiz_papercopy https://github.com/bumoodle/moodle-quiz_papercopy] - Paper Copy quiz report for Moodle - allows an instructor to create and grade printable copies of Moodle Quizzes &lt;br /&gt;
* Eoin Campbell has a plugin that may be usefull here: https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_htmltable&lt;br /&gt;
* See this [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_wordtable Word table format plugin] for exporting questions (including images) in a question bank into a Word file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequeces in the grade book. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not the case think carefully about how to handle the graded attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #&amp;quot; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on &amp;quot;attempts #&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block &amp;gt; Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back to  Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizfilter.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the score for that question to 0. &lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook.  Now go back and change the score to the original value.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find the question in Question Bank.  Maybe edit the title (Do not use in Bio101).  Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved.  Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.&lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question.   This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have a quiz that is not graded?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# On the quiz editing page, set the score for each question, and the total score for the quiz to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the quiz settings page, there is a grid of check-boxes. Turn off all the ones in the score column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Check that you have a maximum score that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember you can tell gradebook not to include the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I allow a person to retake a quiz if I have it set for 1 attempt?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link &amp;quot;user overrides&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you can change the allowed number of attempts for that user. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I give particular students extra time in a timed quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block there is a link &amp;quot;user overrides&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change the timing of their quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;ve entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an &amp;quot;overridden&amp;quot; flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Quiz submission notification]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can&#039;t people (guests) take a quiz without creating an account and logging in?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular &#039;user&#039; record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same &#039;guest&#039; user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest&#039;s attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Workarounds for allowing guests to see a quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
* A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest,  password = visitor, for everyone to share.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can you explain the error The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you&#039;re not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven&#039;t completed a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
*From your navigation block, click &#039;&#039;Reports&amp;gt;Course participation&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Show only&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Student&amp;quot; and in &#039;&#039;Actions&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;post&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the bottom dropdown &#039;&#039;With selected users&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;send message&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizemail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I download the quiz questions in a non-Moodle format?==&lt;br /&gt;
You might want to keep a local copy of quiz questions as evidence. While Moodle doesn&#039;t offer a built-in method of doing this, suggestions include: &lt;br /&gt;
#previewing the quiz, getting to the review page and from your computer, choosing &amp;quot;Save as...webpage complete&amp;quot; and &lt;br /&gt;
#exporting the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most details of each question. Not very pretty, but accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I turn off question flagging?==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:flag.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a capablity attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don&#039;t want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create system-wide question categories?==&lt;br /&gt;
* As an administrator or user with system permissions,  go to &#039;&#039;Question bank&amp;gt;categories&#039;&#039; in any course.&lt;br /&gt;
*Using the &amp;quot;Add category form&amp;quot; at the bottom of the page, set the parent of the new category to be the system context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme.   However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this &amp;quot;solution&amp;quot;. Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example using the Afterburner theme:   Site Administration &amp;gt;Appearance &amp;gt;Themes &amp;gt;Afterburner  and enter this in the CSS code area:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are other css solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I minimise the load on the server while using quizzes?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid a lot of students starting a quiz at the same time&lt;br /&gt;
*Check these discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=213259&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=215641&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=215130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For other notes on performance with quizzes, see the section &#039;Performance of different Moodle modules&#039; in [[Performance recommendations]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make the quiz timer &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; or move down the page?==&lt;br /&gt;
See this forum thread: [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=210049 How to make the quiz timer float] for one suggestion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are images not included when exporting quiz questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
Images are only included if you export the questions using Moodle XML format. For all other question export formats (including GIFT), you will get broken images. Please see forum post [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=244615 Students not able to see images in exported quiz questions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does the quiz timer keep counting down when the student is not looking at the quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to stop the timer and start it again. Moodle cannot tell the difference between legitimate reasons for doing this (such as a fire alarm requiring evacuation of the test room) or a student simply using time going to another browser and googling the answers. Nor can Moodle tell if the connection has been lost, although the student does now get a warning MDL-42504&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It might be preferable in certain circumstances, such as timed examinations using Quiz, to manually  announce the start/end time, rather then rely on the quiz timer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further comments see:&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=96194&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=177180&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=237847&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a &amp;quot;Never submitted quiz&amp;quot; be submitted?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently  there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was &amp;quot;Never Submitted&amp;quot;, and get it back into the &amp;quot;In progress&amp;quot; state, but there is a tracker issue MDL-35745. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically.  Failing that, see also this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=212819 forum thread] which suggests:&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the quiz : set the &amp;quot;close the quiz&amp;quot; date after today&lt;br /&gt;
# Set &amp;quot;When time expires&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;There is a grace period ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Grade set &amp;quot;Attempts allowed&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;unlimited&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Invite the students who did not close their exams&lt;br /&gt;
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code css&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code css&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que.answersaved .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$options-&amp;gt;marks = self::extract($quiz-&amp;gt;reviewmarks, $when,&lt;br /&gt;
                self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher dry run a quiz before it is released?==&lt;br /&gt;
* You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state.&lt;br /&gt;
* The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about.&lt;br /&gt;
* However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date.&lt;br /&gt;
* How can You accomplish this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
* Make a dummy account with a name like &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrol that user in the course as a student.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a &amp;quot;User override&amp;quot; to the quiz, so &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.&lt;br /&gt;
* Log in as &amp;quot;Test student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Attempt the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Log back in as teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
* Review the attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to Results -&amp;gt; Grades and delete the test attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Un-enrol &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; from your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 3===&lt;br /&gt;
* Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student).&lt;br /&gt;
* This provides them a place to test things out.&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a student doing a quiz for another student?==&lt;br /&gt;
For some ideas on preventing cheating, see the forum thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=271100#p1168345 User dependent locking and unlocking of quizzes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a grade to pass?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section &#039;Setting a grade to pass for a quiz&#039; in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can students upload images to an Essay question?==&lt;br /&gt;
When creating the question,  in the section &#039;&#039;Response format&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;HTML editor + uploaded files.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I would like to know if there is such a thing like &amp;quot;quiz as  video overlay&amp;quot; in moodle some where?==&lt;br /&gt;
If you use [http://discover.techsmith.com/try-camtasia/?gclid=CJGjxND588UCFZAAaQodcRcA8w Camtasia], you can insert questions into the video itself, then export it as a [[SCORM module|SCORM]] package and bring it into Moodle.  The quiz questions will automatically be added to the gradebook.  See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=314580#unread this forum post].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to make a face-to-face quiz with all students answering the questions at the same time?==&lt;br /&gt;
* See this [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/mod_activequiz Active quiz optional plugin], which is an enhanced plugin, based on the original [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/mod_realtimequiz Realtime quiz optional plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to prevent students who passed a quiz from reattempting it?==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/quizaccess_reattemptchecker Reattempt checker] quiz access rule plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make a neater more beautiful quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can move the question information that is usually on a left block to a horizontal position above the question text and thus have a wider area for your question as the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quiz_nicer_layout.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The CSS changes used were:&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info {&lt;br /&gt;
 float: none;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info &amp;gt; div {&lt;br /&gt;
 margin-left: 15px;&lt;br /&gt;
 margin-right: 15px;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info &amp;gt; div {&lt;br /&gt;
 display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .content {&lt;br /&gt;
 margin: 0 0 0 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info {&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #eee;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #bce8f1;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-radius: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-bottom: -5px;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 8px;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que h3.no {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 12px;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-left: 10px;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To make it look like one block you should change:&lt;br /&gt;
 - border: 1px solid #bce8f1;&lt;br /&gt;
 - margin-bottom: -5px;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=319464 How can I make quizzes neater and more beautiful?] forum thread&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=237589 How to extend the width of the quiz question area?] and  [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=276651 using Essential theme how to move info div in quiz attempt section to the top of question] forum threads&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz Time Limit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=96326 Removing &amp;quot;Submit all and Finish&amp;quot; button]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141003 How do you keep people from cheating while taking a quiz?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131325 Scientific notation in quiz answers]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=158846 Quiz answers appear in wrong language]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196206 Random Order Override]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related FAQs:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]] - for hints on importing questions&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]] - for information on creating and importing questions in Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.alfiekohn.org/teaching/cheating.htm Who is Cheating Whom] article&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Examen FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Guide_for_new_administrators&amp;diff=120377</id>
		<title>Talk:Guide for new administrators</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Guide_for_new_administrators&amp;diff=120377"/>
		<updated>2015-11-17T13:27:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing talk&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=120366</id>
		<title>Lesson settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=120366"/>
		<updated>2015-11-15T19:50:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Undo revision 120365 by Danielle tilinca (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Lesson administration settings=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains the settings involved when first creating a lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
To add a lesson to your Moodle course page:&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your lesson, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and choose &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonintro.png|thumb|500px|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the lesson so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your lesson here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonappearance.png|thumb|404px|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===File pop===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to include a link to a file on the lesson page for students to refer to, upload it here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Progress bar===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to show a bar at the bottom of the page showing how far into the lesson the student has got.&lt;br /&gt;
* For lessons containing &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039;, once a lesson has been taken to the end, if that same lesson is re-taken, the progress bar will not be &amp;quot;reset&amp;quot;, i.e. it will show a 100% progress from page 1! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* For lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039; and set to &amp;quot;Re-take&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039;, the progress bar is always &amp;quot;reset&amp;quot; at 0% upon re-take.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Note that the Lesson Progress bar only works correctly for lessons with a &amp;quot;straightforward&amp;quot; navigation, such as page 1 -&amp;gt; page  2 -&amp;gt; page n -&amp;gt; end of lesson. It is not guaranteed to work with pages &amp;quot;jumping all over the place&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display ongoing score===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to let students see their score as they work through the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display left menu=== &lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a list of the pages in the Lesson so a student can see what is coming up.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum grade to display menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want the student to go through the lesson once and get a grade before they can (on review) see and navigate through all the different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Slideshow height, width and background colour are set for the whole site by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the default number of answer boxes available when you add your question or content pages. For instance, if you are only going to use True/False, you would only need 2. You can change this at any time so it&#039;s not crucial.&lt;br /&gt;
===Use default feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a set phrase regardless of their answer. If you have set your own default feedback such as &amp;quot;well done; correct&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;never mind; better luck next time&amp;quot; etc it will appear. If you have not, then Moodle&#039;s default feedback will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to next activity===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to give students a link to another activity when they reach the end of the lesson. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved using [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessontimelimit.png|thumb|470px|Availability settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Available from/Deadline===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a start and end date and time for your Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Time limit=== &lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set a time limit on the lesson which can now be seconds, minutes, hours, days or weeks. Students will see a countdown counter in a block as they work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessontimeremaining.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The timer does not stop them doing the lesson when the time is up, but  correct answers are no longer scored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password protected lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
*Change to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;  and enter the password if you want students only to access it when they know the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisite lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Note: You will only see this setting if you have a course with prerequisite lessons upgraded from an earlier version of Moodle.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a warning that prerequisites are due to be removed completely.&lt;br /&gt;
*Please use access restrictions instead. See [[Conditional activities]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:flowcontrol.png|thumb|450px|Flow control settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
This puts a &amp;quot;Review Lesson&amp;quot; button on the last screen of the lesson to encourage the students to navigate through the lesson again from the start.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the students will not be able to &#039;&#039;change&#039;&#039; their answers, only &#039;&#039;view&#039;&#039; them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Provide option to try a question again===&lt;br /&gt;
*This displays a button after an incorrectly answered question so that the student can try again (but not get credit for it)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Leave this off if you are using essay questions. &lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
*Decide here how many times you want students to be able to attempt each question. When they reach the maximum, they will be taken automatically to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this setting works in combination with the above setting, or independently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When &#039;provide an option to try again&#039; is set to No, students will be able to retake the question as many times as it is set here, with a score penalty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When &#039;provide an option to try again&#039; is set to Yes, then students will be able to retake the question as many times as it set here without a score penalty. In this case an extra dialogue appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consequently when the relevant jump &#039;this page&#039; is used in wrong answer while the &#039;provide an option to try again&#039; is set to No and &#039;maximum number of attempts&#039; is set to 1, a student that will answer wrongly will be moved into the next page, since he/she has the change to try the question just once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; Ensure you check lesson using a real student account, as the teacher preview or the &#039;switch role to student&#039; may not give you the exact picture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after a Correct Answer===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here where you want a student to be sent to if they get a question right. See [[Using Lesson]] for more details on this setting. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
**the next part of the Lesson (default setting)&lt;br /&gt;
**a random, unexpected page&lt;br /&gt;
**a random page which they have not yet answered.&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of pages to show===&lt;br /&gt;
You only need this if you have set &amp;quot;Action after a correct answer&amp;quot; to show an unseen or unanswered page. Otherwise, all pages will be seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongradetopass.png|thumb|450px|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set a grade and grade category here, along with a &amp;quot;Grade to pass&amp;quot; which may be connected with [[Activity completion]] and [[Conditional activities]] such that a student will not be able to access a follow up activity until they have obtained the required grade in the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Practice lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 2.9:&#039;&#039;&#039; Practice lessons are now saved; this means they will appear in the reports .You must enable the &amp;quot;Retakes allowed&amp;quot; setting if you want students to be able to attempt a practice lesson several times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: If you are upgrading from an earlier version, be aware that all practice lessons will have &amp;quot; Re-takes allowed&amp;quot;  set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; . If you are restoring  a practice lesson made before this change, you may need to  modify the &amp;quot;Re-takes allowed&amp;quot; setting if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom Scoring===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to give a particular number score (negative or positive) to each answer&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want your students to be able to do the lesson more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that this setting only applies to lessons containing &#039;&#039;Question pages&#039;&#039;. Lessons consisting &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of &#039;&#039;Content pages&#039;&#039; can be re-taken even if &#039;Re-takes allowed&#039; is set to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
====Handling of re-take====&lt;br /&gt;
If you allow your students to re-take the lesson, then decide here if the grade for all lesson attempts is the mean or the maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the Question Analysis always uses the answers from the first tries of the lesson. Re-takes by students are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum Number of Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the minimum number of questions that will be used to calculate a student&#039;s score. Students will  be told how many they have answered and how many more they need to answer.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Content pages, then set this to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you use this setting, then add some explanatory text at the start of the lesson so the student knows how many questions they must answer as a minimum. (They may answer more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 2.9&#039;&#039;&#039;: The Lesson activity now supports groups and groupings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that in addition to the standard activity completion conditions, the Lesson also has &#039;Require end reached&#039; and &#039;Require time spent&#039; criteria . {{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
*To learn more about the Lesson completion conditions, see [[Activity completion settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User and group overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson has been created, it is possible to overrride certain settings for individuals and groups. The settings for this are located in the Lesson administration block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonoverrides.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to override passwords, availability/deadline, time limits and question retries and lesson retakes.&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting one of the options, for example &#039;User&#039; will display a button to click. From the next screen you can choose the user or group to override and the settings you wish to override:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonoverrideuser.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the override is saved, it is displayed on a screen along with any other overrides previously set:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonoverrideexamples.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowwidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow background colour===&lt;br /&gt;
Background colour to for the slideshow if it is enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowbgcolor, Default #FFFFFF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediawidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window  height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show close button:===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a close button as part of the popup generated for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaclose, Default No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of high scores displayed===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: This feature is currently broken. Its future is being discussed in MDL-49581&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Default maximum number of answers per page for site&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxanswers, Default: 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after correct answer===&lt;br /&gt;
The default action to take after a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_defaultnextpage, Default: Normal - follow lesson path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de lección]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120362</id>
		<title>File system repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120362"/>
		<updated>2015-11-15T13:03:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Setting up an individual file system repository instance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
The file system repository allows access to files which have been uploaded (e.g. via FTP) into designated folders on the server. &#039;&#039;(Note that these folders are &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; created inside  the Moodle site, but on the server where Moodle is hosted.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A file system repository may be available site wide for everyone or  within an individual course (set up by admin) or for an individual administrator. See MDL-28656 regarding course and individual repository configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This must be done by a systems admin who has write permissions to the server directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a file from the file system repository is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or alias. See [[Working with files]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a repository has been created and files uploaded to it, the files can be made available within the file picker for use within a course.  There are several steps to take to implement this feature:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These must be done by a systems admin who  has write permissions to the server directories and admin permissions within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating  folders for your file system repositories==&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the moodledata folder on the server&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside it, create a folder  called &amp;quot;repository&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside that folder, create as many folders as you need, named appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemonserver.png|thumb|250px|Creating repositories on the server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy into the appropriate folder the files you want (using FTP, SFTP, shared folder etc.). (The folders can hold all types of files)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the File System repository plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage Repositories&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select from the drop down next to File system &amp;quot;Enabled and visible&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Ignore the similarly named repository &#039;Server Files&#039; (enabled by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemrepo23.png|thumb|350px|Enabling the file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a site-wide file system repository==&lt;br /&gt;
Having clicked the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link as above:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down to Repositories instances of the site&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Create a repository instance&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and (if there are several folders on the server) choose from the dropdown the one you want. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*It will now be available in the file picker in all courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createinstance23.png|thumb|Creating a new file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:setuprepo23.png|thumb|Selecting and naming the repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Just repeat the process to get more than one site wide file system repository&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a repository inside a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the course (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the desired course and click on “repositories” in the administration block(2 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Create File System instance&amp;quot; (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:courseinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable course repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:coursesettingsrepo1.png|thumb|2:Click &amp;quot;Repositories&amp;quot; in Course admin]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createcourseinstance.png|thumb|3:Click to create an instance in the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up an individual file system repository instance==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the user context (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the user menu &amp;gt;Preferences&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “Repositories” &lt;br /&gt;
*Click “Create File System instance”&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This will create a personal file system repository connecting just you to a folder on the server (2 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable user repository instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userprivaterepo.png|thumb|2:Adding files from individual repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload any files required by course creators to the appropriate folders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server permissions  are needed here to add via FTP (or other method) the required files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this point on the check boxes need not be set - leaving them set just invites people to create a repository instance and then advises them that they do not have sufficient privilges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using a File System repository file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A user  can now make use of the uploaded files by accessing the repository from within the file picker, creating a resource link to a document, for example.  This process copies the uploaded file into Moodle and students may access the resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfilerepodisplay1.png|thumb|350px|Adding a file from a file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that file types are respected (based on file extensions), so if you are adding an image in the editor, then you won&#039;t see Office docs (for example) appear in the File Picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one capability, [[Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view|View file system repository]], which is allowed for the default authenticated user role.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that if a student is required to upload a file - upload assignment, for example, then the repository files may be browsed.  It may be more appropriate for this permission to be changed so that course creators have the capabilty, but not students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[File_system_repository_FAQ|File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview of [[Repositories|Repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2010/06/15/ftp-files-into-moodle-2-0-with-the-repository-api/ FTP files into Moodle 2.0 with the repository API article from somerandomthoughts.com] including screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dateisystem-Repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Repositorio_sistema_de_archivo]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120361</id>
		<title>File system repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120361"/>
		<updated>2015-11-15T12:59:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
The file system repository allows access to files which have been uploaded (e.g. via FTP) into designated folders on the server. &#039;&#039;(Note that these folders are &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; created inside  the Moodle site, but on the server where Moodle is hosted.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A file system repository may be available site wide for everyone or  within an individual course (set up by admin) or for an individual administrator. See MDL-28656 regarding course and individual repository configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This must be done by a systems admin who has write permissions to the server directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a file from the file system repository is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or alias. See [[Working with files]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a repository has been created and files uploaded to it, the files can be made available within the file picker for use within a course.  There are several steps to take to implement this feature:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These must be done by a systems admin who  has write permissions to the server directories and admin permissions within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating  folders for your file system repositories==&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the moodledata folder on the server&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside it, create a folder  called &amp;quot;repository&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside that folder, create as many folders as you need, named appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemonserver.png|thumb|250px|Creating repositories on the server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy into the appropriate folder the files you want (using FTP, SFTP, shared folder etc.). (The folders can hold all types of files)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the File System repository plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage Repositories&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select from the drop down next to File system &amp;quot;Enabled and visible&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Ignore the similarly named repository &#039;Server Files&#039; (enabled by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemrepo23.png|thumb|350px|Enabling the file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a site-wide file system repository==&lt;br /&gt;
Having clicked the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link as above:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down to Repositories instances of the site&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Create a repository instance&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and (if there are several folders on the server) choose from the dropdown the one you want. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*It will now be available in the file picker in all courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createinstance23.png|thumb|Creating a new file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:setuprepo23.png|thumb|Selecting and naming the repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Just repeat the process to get more than one site wide file system repository&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a repository inside a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the course (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the desired course and click on “repositories” in the administration block(2 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Create File System instance&amp;quot; (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:courseinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable course repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:coursesettingsrepo1.png|thumb|2:Click &amp;quot;Repositories&amp;quot; in Course admin]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createcourseinstance.png|thumb|3:Click to create an instance in the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up an individual file system repository instance==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the user context (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the user menu &amp;gt;Preferences&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “Repositories” &lt;br /&gt;
*Click “Create File System instance”&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This will create a personal file system repository connecting just you to a folder on the server (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable user repository instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userprivaterepo.png|thumb|3:Adding files from individual repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload any files required by course creators to the appropriate folders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server permissions  are needed here to add via FTP (or other method) the required files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this point on the check boxes need not be set - leaving them set just invites people to create a repository instance and then advises them that they do not have sufficient privilges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using a File System repository file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A user  can now make use of the uploaded files by accessing the repository from within the file picker, creating a resource link to a document, for example.  This process copies the uploaded file into Moodle and students may access the resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfilerepodisplay1.png|thumb|350px|Adding a file from a file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that file types are respected (based on file extensions), so if you are adding an image in the editor, then you won&#039;t see Office docs (for example) appear in the File Picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one capability, [[Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view|View file system repository]], which is allowed for the default authenticated user role.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that if a student is required to upload a file - upload assignment, for example, then the repository files may be browsed.  It may be more appropriate for this permission to be changed so that course creators have the capabilty, but not students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[File_system_repository_FAQ|File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview of [[Repositories|Repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2010/06/15/ftp-files-into-moodle-2-0-with-the-repository-api/ FTP files into Moodle 2.0 with the repository API article from somerandomthoughts.com] including screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dateisystem-Repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Repositorio_sistema_de_archivo]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120360</id>
		<title>File system repository</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File_system_repository&amp;diff=120360"/>
		<updated>2015-11-15T12:57:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
The file system repository allows access to files which have been uploaded (e.g. via FTP) into designated folders on the server. &#039;&#039;(Note that these folders are &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; created inside  the Moodle site, but on the server where Moodle is hosted.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A file system repository may be available site wide for everyone or  within an individual course (set up by admin) or for an individual administrator. See MDL-28656 regarding course and individual repository configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This must be done by a systems admin who has write permissions to the server directories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a file from the file system repository is re-used elsewhere on Moodle, the teacher has the option to make a copy (a new, unconnected version) or to create a shortcut or alias. See [[Working with files]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a repository has been created and files uploaded to it, the files can be made available within the file picker for use within a course.  There are several steps to take to implement this feature:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These must be done by a systems admin who  has write permissions to the server directories and admin permissions within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating  folders for your file system repositories==&lt;br /&gt;
*Find the moodledata folder on the server&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside it, create a folder  called &amp;quot;repository&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Inside that folder, create as many folders as you need, named appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemonserver.png|thumb|250px|Creating repositories on the server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy into the appropriate folder the files you want (using FTP, SFTP, shared folder etc.). (The folders can hold all types of files)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the File System repository plugin==&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage Repositories&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
*Select from the drop down next to File system &amp;quot;Enabled and visible&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Ignore the similarly named repository &#039;Server Files&#039; (enabled by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:filesystemrepo23.png|thumb|350px|Enabling the file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; link..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a site-wide file system repository==&lt;br /&gt;
Having clicked the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link as above:&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down to Repositories instances of the site&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Create a repository instance&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Give it a name and (if there are several folders on the server) choose from the dropdown the one you want. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*It will now be available in the file picker in all courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createinstance23.png|thumb|Creating a new file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:setuprepo23.png|thumb|Selecting and naming the repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Just repeat the process to get more than one site wide file system repository&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a repository inside a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the course (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the desired course and click on “repositories” in the administration block(2 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Scroll down and click &amp;quot;Create File System instance&amp;quot; (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:courseinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable course repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:coursesettingsrepo1.png|thumb|2:Click &amp;quot;Repositories&amp;quot; in Course admin]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createcourseinstance.png|thumb|3:Click to create an instance in the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up an individual file system repository instance==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NOTE: Only Moodle admins can do this&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable repositories as in the instructions above. On the Settings page:&lt;br /&gt;
*Check the top box allowing users to add a repository instance to the user context (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the user menu &amp;gt;Profile&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “Repositories” (2 below)&lt;br /&gt;
*Click “Create File System instance”&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process as [[#Setting_up_a_site-wide_file_system_repository|here]]&lt;br /&gt;
*This will create a personal file system repository connecting just you to a folder on the server (3 below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userinstancerepo.png|thumb|1:Enable user repository instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:profilerepolink.png|thumb|2:Click the Repositories link in profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:userprivaterepo.png|thumb|3:Adding files from individual repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Upload any files required by course creators to the appropriate folders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server permissions  are needed here to add via FTP (or other method) the required files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this point on the check boxes need not be set - leaving them set just invites people to create a repository instance and then advises them that they do not have sufficient privilges.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using a File System repository file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A user  can now make use of the uploaded files by accessing the repository from within the file picker, creating a resource link to a document, for example.  This process copies the uploaded file into Moodle and students may access the resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfilerepodisplay1.png|thumb|350px|Adding a file from a file system repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that file types are respected (based on file extensions), so if you are adding an image in the editor, then you won&#039;t see Office docs (for example) appear in the File Picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repository capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one capability, [[Capabilities/repository/filesystem:view|View file system repository]], which is allowed for the default authenticated user role.&lt;br /&gt;
This means that if a student is required to upload a file - upload assignment, for example, then the repository files may be browsed.  It may be more appropriate for this permission to be changed so that course creators have the capabilty, but not students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[File_system_repository_FAQ|File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Restoring file aliases]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview of [[Repositories|Repositories]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2010/06/15/ftp-files-into-moodle-2-0-with-the-repository-api/ FTP files into Moodle 2.0 with the repository API article from somerandomthoughts.com] including screencast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Dateisystem-Repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Repositorio_sistema_de_archivo]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=120357</id>
		<title>Quiz FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&amp;diff=120357"/>
		<updated>2015-11-12T18:56:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing guest preview&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I randomly generate a quiz from a larger question bank?==&lt;br /&gt;
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are various ways to answer this:&lt;br /&gt;
# You can&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won&#039;t accidentally miss questions.&lt;br /&gt;
# OK, so you want us to write code that won&#039;t let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like &amp;quot;asdf&amp;quot; into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link &amp;quot;group override&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student&#039;s attempts and can give the student credit for them by hand. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students answers would then get graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a nice way to print a copy of a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Yes - use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other printing options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [http://www.academic-moodle-cooperation.org Academic Moodle Cooperation] of the University of Vienna and the Vienna University of Technology have contributed the [[mod/offlinequiz/mod| Offline quiz activity]] for Moodle 2.6, available from the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_offlinequiz Moodle plugins database] (Moodle 2.2 and 2.5 versions are available via Github, and a 2.8 version will probably appear soon). This MC Offline quiz module (mod/offlinequiz) adds paper-and-pencil multiple-choice quizzes to Moodle. In offline quizzes students mark answers to questions on a sheet of paper (the answer form).  &lt;br /&gt;
* See [https://github.com/bumoodle/moodle-quiz_papercopy https://github.com/bumoodle/moodle-quiz_papercopy] - Paper Copy quiz report for Moodle - allows an instructor to create and grade printable copies of Moodle Quizzes &lt;br /&gt;
* Eoin Campbell has a plugin that may be usefull here: https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_htmltable&lt;br /&gt;
* See this [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_wordtable Word table format plugin] for exporting questions (including images) in a question bank into a Word file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequeces in the grade book. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not the case think carefully about how to handle the graded attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #&amp;quot; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on &amp;quot;attempts #&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block &amp;gt; Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back to  Quiz Administration &amp;gt; Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link &amp;quot;filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizfilter.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the score for that question to 0. &lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook.  Now go back and change the score to the original value.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find the question in Question Bank.  Maybe edit the title (Do not use in Bio101).  Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved.  Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.&lt;br /&gt;
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question.   This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I have a quiz that is not graded?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# On the quiz editing page, set the score for each question, and the total score for the quiz to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the quiz settings page, there is a grid of check-boxes. Turn off all the ones in the score column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Check that you have a maximum score that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember you can tell gradebook not to include the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I allow a person to retake a quiz if I have it set for 1 attempt?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link &amp;quot;user overrides&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you can change the allowed number of attempts for that user. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I give particular students extra time in a timed quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Quiz administration settings block there is a link &amp;quot;user overrides&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change the timing of their quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I&#039;ve entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an &amp;quot;overridden&amp;quot; flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Quiz submission notification]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can&#039;t people (guests) take a quiz without creating an account and logging in?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular &#039;user&#039; record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same &#039;guest&#039; user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest&#039;s attempts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Workarounds for allowing guests to see a quiz===&lt;br /&gt;
* A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = password = visitor, for everyone to share.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can you explain the error The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you&#039;re not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven&#039;t completed a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
*From your navigation block, click &#039;&#039;Reports&amp;gt;Course participation&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Show only&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Student&amp;quot; and in &#039;&#039;Actions&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;post&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the bottom dropdown &#039;&#039;With selected users&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;send message&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizemail.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I download the quiz questions in a non-Moodle format?==&lt;br /&gt;
You might want to keep a local copy of quiz questions as evidence. While Moodle doesn&#039;t offer a built-in method of doing this, suggestions include: &lt;br /&gt;
#previewing the quiz, getting to the review page and from your computer, choosing &amp;quot;Save as...webpage complete&amp;quot; and &lt;br /&gt;
#exporting the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most details of each question. Not very pretty, but accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I turn off question flagging?==&lt;br /&gt;
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:flag.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a capablity attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don&#039;t want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create system-wide question categories?==&lt;br /&gt;
* As an administrator or user with system permissions,  go to &#039;&#039;Question bank&amp;gt;categories&#039;&#039; in any course.&lt;br /&gt;
*Using the &amp;quot;Add category form&amp;quot; at the bottom of the page, set the parent of the new category to be the system context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme.   However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this &amp;quot;solution&amp;quot;. Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example using the Afterburner theme:   Site Administration &amp;gt;Appearance &amp;gt;Themes &amp;gt;Afterburner  and enter this in the CSS code area:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are other css solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I minimise the load on the server while using quizzes?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Try to avoid a lot of students starting a quiz at the same time&lt;br /&gt;
*Check these discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=213259&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=215641&lt;br /&gt;
**https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=215130&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For other notes on performance with quizzes, see the section &#039;Performance of different Moodle modules&#039; in [[Performance recommendations]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make the quiz timer &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; or move down the page?==&lt;br /&gt;
See this forum thread: [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=210049 How to make the quiz timer float] for one suggestion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are images not included when exporting quiz questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
Images are only included if you export the questions using Moodle XML format. For all other question export formats (including GIFT), you will get broken images. Please see forum post [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=244615 Students not able to see images in exported quiz questions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why does the quiz timer keep counting down when the student is not looking at the quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to stop the timer and start it again. Moodle cannot tell the difference between legitimate reasons for doing this (such as a fire alarm requiring evacuation of the test room) or a student simply using time going to another browser and googling the answers. Nor can Moodle tell if the connection has been lost, although the student does now get a warning MDL-42504&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It might be preferable in certain circumstances, such as timed examinations using Quiz, to manually  announce the start/end time, rather then rely on the quiz timer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further comments see:&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=96194&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=177180&lt;br /&gt;
* https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=237847&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a &amp;quot;Never submitted quiz&amp;quot; be submitted?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently  there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was &amp;quot;Never Submitted&amp;quot;, and get it back into the &amp;quot;In progress&amp;quot; state, but there is a tracker issue MDL-35745. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically.  Failing that, see also this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=212819 forum thread] which suggests:&lt;br /&gt;
# Update the quiz : set the &amp;quot;close the quiz&amp;quot; date after today&lt;br /&gt;
# Set &amp;quot;When time expires&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;There is a grace period ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Grade set &amp;quot;Attempts allowed&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;unlimited&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Invite the students who did not close their exams&lt;br /&gt;
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code css&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code css&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
.que.answersaved .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,&lt;br /&gt;
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code php&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$options-&amp;gt;marks = self::extract($quiz-&amp;gt;reviewmarks, $when,&lt;br /&gt;
                self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher dry run a quiz before it is released?==&lt;br /&gt;
* You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state.&lt;br /&gt;
* The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about.&lt;br /&gt;
* However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date.&lt;br /&gt;
* How can You accomplish this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 1===&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Method 2===&lt;br /&gt;
* Make a dummy account with a name like &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrol that user in the course as a student.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a &amp;quot;User override&amp;quot; to the quiz, so &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.&lt;br /&gt;
* Log in as &amp;quot;Test student&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Attempt the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Log back in as teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
* Review the attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to Results -&amp;gt; Grades and delete the test attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
* Un-enrol &amp;quot;Test Student&amp;quot; from your course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Method 3===&lt;br /&gt;
* Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student).&lt;br /&gt;
* This provides them a place to test things out.&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a student doing a quiz for another student?==&lt;br /&gt;
For some ideas on preventing cheating, see the forum thread [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=271100#p1168345 User dependent locking and unlocking of quizzes].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a grade to pass?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section &#039;Setting a grade to pass for a quiz&#039; in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can students upload images to an Essay question?==&lt;br /&gt;
When creating the question,  in the section &#039;&#039;Response format&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;HTML editor + uploaded files.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I would like to know if there is such a thing like &amp;quot;quiz as  video overlay&amp;quot; in moodle some where?==&lt;br /&gt;
If you use [http://discover.techsmith.com/try-camtasia/?gclid=CJGjxND588UCFZAAaQodcRcA8w Camtasia], you can insert questions into the video itself, then export it as a [[SCORM module|SCORM]] package and bring it into Moodle.  The quiz questions will automatically be added to the gradebook.  See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=314580#unread this forum post].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to make a face-to-face quiz with all students answering the questions at the same time?==&lt;br /&gt;
* See this [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/mod_activequiz Active quiz optional plugin], which is an enhanced plugin, based on the original [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/mod_realtimequiz Realtime quiz optional plugin].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Is there a way to prevent students who passed a quiz from reattempting it?==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view/quizaccess_reattemptchecker Reattempt checker] quiz access rule plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make a neater more beautiful quiz?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can move the question information that is usually on a left block to a horizontal position above the question text and thus have a wider area for your question as the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quiz_nicer_layout.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The CSS changes used were:&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info {&lt;br /&gt;
 float: none;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info &amp;gt; div {&lt;br /&gt;
 margin-left: 15px;&lt;br /&gt;
 margin-right: 15px;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info &amp;gt; div {&lt;br /&gt;
 display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .content {&lt;br /&gt;
 margin: 0 0 0 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 width: auto;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que .info {&lt;br /&gt;
    background-color: #eee;&lt;br /&gt;
    border: 1px solid #bce8f1;&lt;br /&gt;
    border-radius: 4px;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-bottom: -5px;&lt;br /&gt;
    padding: 8px;&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
 .que h3.no {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: inline;&lt;br /&gt;
    font-size: 12px;&lt;br /&gt;
    line-height: 1;&lt;br /&gt;
    margin-left: 10px;&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To make it look like one block you should change:&lt;br /&gt;
 - border: 1px solid #bce8f1;&lt;br /&gt;
 - margin-bottom: -5px;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=319464 How can I make quizzes neater and more beautiful?] forum thread&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=237589 How to extend the width of the quiz question area?] and  [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=276651 using Essential theme how to move info div in quiz attempt section to the top of question] forum threads&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz Time Limit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=96326 Removing &amp;quot;Submit all and Finish&amp;quot; button]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141003 How do you keep people from cheating while taking a quiz?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=131325 Scientific notation in quiz answers]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=158846 Quiz answers appear in wrong language]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196206 Random Order Override]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related FAQs:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]] - for hints on importing questions&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]] - for information on creating and importing questions in Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.alfiekohn.org/teaching/cheating.htm Who is Cheating Whom] article&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Examen FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Activity_completion_settings&amp;diff=120310</id>
		<title>Activity completion settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Activity_completion_settings&amp;diff=120310"/>
		<updated>2015-11-02T14:29:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: screenshot and extra details&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activity completion}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Activity settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the type of activity, there are different completion requirements. For example, a [[Page|Page]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require view&#039;&#039;; a [[Quiz|Quiz]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require grade&#039;&#039; while a [[Forum|Forum]] might have the requirement to &#039;&#039;require posts/discussions/replies&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Activity_completion_settings_common.png|Common settings for most graded activities&lt;br /&gt;
File:Forumactivitycompletion.png|Forum activity settings&lt;br /&gt;
File:24assignmentsubmit.png|Assignment settings&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Completion tracking===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Do not indicate activity completion&#039;&#039; - this will not show checks (ticks) next to the activity&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Students can manually mark the activity as completed&#039;&#039; - students press the check (tick) to change it. (Note: they can do this even without doing the activity!)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;Show activity as complete when conditions are met&#039;&#039; - the selected completion criteria must be met before the check (tick) will change style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require view===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is turned on, students have to view the activity in order to complete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases, clicking the link is enough to &#039;view&#039; the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
* You should usually not turn on the &#039;view&#039; condition if you have other requirements - this makes extra work for the server and it&#039;s unlikely that a student could meet any other conditions without viewing the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require grade===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is turned on, students have to get a grade on the activity in order to complete it. For example, a quiz would be marked completed as soon as the user submits it (so long as it doesn&#039;t contain any &amp;quot;essay&amp;quot; questions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It does not matter how well the student did. Getting any grade will mark the activity completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting a grade to pass for a quiz====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to distinguish between &#039;pass&#039; and &#039;fail&#039; grades so that a quiz becomes &#039;completed, passed&#039; or &#039;completed, not passed&#039; instead of just &#039;completed&#039;. These results show a different icon and alternative text in &#039;&#039;Course administration &amp;gt;Reports &amp;gt;Activity completion:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizpassfail.png|thumb|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set this up, you need to specify the pass value for the quiz activity&#039;s individual grade:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the Quiz settings and in the Grade section, locate the &#039;Grade to pass&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a grade value (e.g. 5.0) &lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;Completed, passed&#039; shows a green tick and &#039;Completed, not passed&#039; shows a red cross.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have done this, anybody submitting the quiz will receive either the pass or fail completion icon. If the quiz can be taken multiple times, the completion icon will automatically update whenever the grade does.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one limitation: this only works if grades are immediately visible to students. The grade must be neither permanently hidden, nor hidden until a certain date. If a grade is hidden then only the standard &#039;completed&#039; state will be displayed - even once the hidden date has passed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quiz completion settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following settings are specific to the quiz (in addition to the standard ones).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:quizpassinggrade.png|thumb|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Require passing grade====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a &#039;Grade to pass&#039; is set for the quiz then it will be marked complete once the student obtains this grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====All available attempts completed====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a certain number of attempts are allowed, the quiz may be marked complete once the student has done them all (even if, for example, they did not achieve the passing grade.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson completion settings===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}The following settings are specific to the Lesson activity (in additon to the standard ones)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newlessonconditions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Require end reached====&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the lesson to be marked complete, the student must go to the very last page of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Require time spent====&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the lesson to be marked complete, the student must stay within the lesson pages for the time specified by the teacher here. The time can range from seconds to weeks. If they finish the lesson sooner, they will see an alert saying they did not reach the minimum time acceptable and may have to repeat the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:lessonstudentviewrequiretimespent.png|thumb|400px|center|Student message if the condition is not met.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require submission===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting appears in assignments and means that an assignment may  be considered as completed once the student has submitted -  but before the teacher has had time to grade it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Expect completed on===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The date is not shown to students and is only displayed in the [[Activity completion report]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require posts===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot; the student must either start a discussion or reply to a discussion. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require discussions===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot;, the student must start a discussion topic. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require replies===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is seen in forums. For the forum to be classed as &amp;quot;complete&amp;quot; the student must reply to a discussion. The number of posts they must make can be specified in the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locked completion options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If at least one person has completed an activity, completion options are &#039;locked&#039;. This is because changing these options may result in unexpected behaviour.  For example, if somebody has ticked an activity as manually completed, and you then set it to automatic completion, the activity will become unticked - very confusing for the student who had already ticked it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; It is best not to unlock options unless you are sure it won&#039;t cause problems - for example, if you know that students don&#039;t have access to the course yet, so it will only be staff who have marked the activity completed when testing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens when you unlock==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you unlock options and then click &#039;Save changes&#039;, all completion information for the activity will be deleted and, if possible, regenerated according to the new settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If the new completion option is manual, everyone will be set to &#039;not completed&#039; regardless of any previous setting.&lt;br /&gt;
* If it is automatic then, depending on the options chosen, the system may or may not be able to construct a correct current value for everyone.&lt;br /&gt;
** The &#039;viewed&#039; requirement will not work - even if a student has viewed the activity before, it will not be marked completed until they view it again.&lt;br /&gt;
** Most other options will be recalculated successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you change completion options while a student is logged in, they may not see the changes for some minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Required site settings==&lt;br /&gt;
To use activity completion, the feature needs to be enabled for the site by an administrator as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; [[Advanced_features| Advanced features]]&#039;&#039; check the &amp;quot;Enable completion tracking&amp;quot; box.&lt;br /&gt;
*The admin may also set the default completion tracking setting when adding new activities, choosing from &#039;Do not indicate completion&#039; or &#039; Use activity default&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:26defaultactivtycompletion.png|thumb|Selecting the default completion tracking setting]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Required course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; and look for the &#039;&#039;Completion tracking&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must enable this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen zum Aktivitätsabschluss]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de finalización de actividad]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File:quizpassfail.png&amp;diff=120309</id>
		<title>File:quizpassfail.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File:quizpassfail.png&amp;diff=120309"/>
		<updated>2015-11-02T14:28:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_TeX_Notation&amp;diff=120302</id>
		<title>Using TeX Notation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_TeX_Notation&amp;diff=120302"/>
		<updated>2015-10-30T10:11:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Filters}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
TeX (&#039;&#039;&#039;/&#039;tɛx/tekh&#039;&#039;&#039;, often pronounced TeK in English)  is a very widespread and popular way of representing Mathematics notation using only characters that you can type on a keyboard (see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TeX Wikipedia]).  This makes it a useful format to use in Moodle, since it can be entered anywhere you can type text, from forum posts to quiz questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TeX expressions can be entered in multiple ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* typing them directly into texts.&lt;br /&gt;
* using the Java-based Dragmath editor in Moodle&#039;s TinyMCE editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* using the HTML-based equation editor in Moodle&#039;s Atto editor (since Moodle 2.7).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afterwards, TeX expressions are rendered into Mathematics notation:&lt;br /&gt;
* using the TeX filter in Moodle, which uses a TeX binary installed on the server to convert expressions into .gif images (or if that is not available, it falls back to a simple built-in mimetex binary).&lt;br /&gt;
* using the [[MathJax_filter]] which identifies TeX expressions and uses the Mathjax JS library to render them in browsers at display time (since Moodle 2.7).&lt;br /&gt;
* using other third-party solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can imagine, the whole field is not simple as we&#039;d like, especially because there are many flavours of TeX and slight variations between tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page focusses only on using TeX in core Moodle.  See the links at the bottom of this page for more information on setting up TeX editors and filters, including other tools from the Moodle community that may be suitable for advanced users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING:&#039;&#039;&#039; This Wiki environment uses a DIFFERENT TeX renderer to Moodle, especially when it comes to control sequences.  For this reason images are sometimes used to represent what it should look like in Moodle.   YMMV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Language Conventions== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a TeX sequence in your text, surround it with $$ markers. To invoke a particular command or control sequence, use the backslash, \. A typical control sequence looks like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ x\ =\ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2}\ \times\ (y\ +\ 12) $$  &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex10.gif|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fraction and square root.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional spaces can be placed into the equation using the \ without a trailing character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reserved Characters and Keywords==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most characters and numbers on the keyboard can be used at their default value. As with any computing language, though, there are a set of reserved characters and keywords that are used by the program for its own purposes. TeX Notation is no different, but it does have a very small set of Reserved Characters. This will not be a complete list of reserved characters, but some of these are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  @ # $ % ^ &amp;amp; * ( ) . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use these characters in an equation just place the \ in front of them like \$ or \%. If you want to use the backslash, just use \backslash. The only exception here seems to be the &amp;amp;, ampersand. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Superscripts, Subscripts and Roots==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Superscripts are recorded using the caret, ^, symbol. An example for a Maths class might be: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 4^2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = 4^5 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  This is a shorthand way of saying: &lt;br /&gt;
  (4 x 4) x (4 x 4 x 4) = (4 x 4 x 4 x 4 x 4)&lt;br /&gt;
  or&lt;br /&gt;
  16 x 64 = 1024.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4^2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = 4^5&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subscripts are similar, but use the underscore character. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 3x_2 \ \times \ 2x_3 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;3x_2 \ \times \ 2x_3&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is OK if you want superscripts or subscripts, but square roots are a little different. This uses a control sequence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \sqrt{64} \ = \ 8 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sqrt{64} \ = \ 8&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also take this a little further, but adding in a control character. You may ask a question like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ If \ \sqrt[n]{1024} \ = \ 4, \ what \ is \ the \ value \ of \ n? $$  &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;If \ \sqrt[n]{1024} \ = \ 4, \ what \ is \ the \ value \ of \ n?&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using these different commands allows you to develop equations like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ The \sqrt{64} \ \times \ 2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = \ 1024 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;The \sqrt{64} \ \times \ 2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = \ 1024&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Superscripts, Subscripts and roots can also be noted in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fractions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fractions in TeX are actually simple, as long as you remember the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \frac{numerator}{denominator} $$ which produces &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{numerator}{denominator}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be given as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{5}{10} \ is \ equal \ to \ \frac{1}{2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is entered as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \frac{5}{10} \ is \ equal \ to \ \frac{1}{2}.$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With fractions (as with other commands) the curly brackets can be nested so that for example you can implement negative exponents in fractions.  As you can see,&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\frac {5^{-2}}{3}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac {5^{-2}}{3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^{-3}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^{-3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  and&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\frac{3}{4^{-3}}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{3}{4^{-3}} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  You likely do not want to use $$\frac{3}{4}^{-3}$$ as it produces &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{3}{4}^{-3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use fractions and negative exponents in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Brackets==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As students advance through Maths, they come into contact with brackets. Algebraic notation depends heavily on brackets. The usual keyboard values of ( and ) are useful, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = 2 \ \times \ (4 \ - \ j)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is written as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ d = 2 \ \times \ (4 \ - \ j) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, these brackets are enough for most formulae but they will not be in some circumstances. Consider this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4x^3 \ + \ (x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is OK, but try it this way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4x^3 \ + \ \left(x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4}\right)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be achieved by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 4x^3 \ + \ \left(x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4}\right) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A simple change using the \left( and \right) symbols instead. Note the actual bracket is both named and presented. Brackets are almost essential in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ellipsis==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ellipsis is a simple code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;x_1, \ x_2, \ \ldots, \ x_n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Written like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ x_1, \ x_2, \ \ldots, \ x_n  $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A more practical application could be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Add together all the numbers from 1 &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ldots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 38.&lt;br /&gt;
  What is an elegant and simple solution to this problem?&lt;br /&gt;
  Can you create an algebraic function to explain this solution?&lt;br /&gt;
  Will your solution work for all numbers?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answer:&lt;br /&gt;
The question uses an even number to demonstrate a mathematical process and generate an algebraic formula.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class = &amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 1:&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 2.&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 3.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;1. \ 1 \ + \ 38 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2. \ 2 \ + \ 37 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;3. \ 3 \ + \ 36 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ldots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;19. 19 \ + \ 20 \ = \ 39 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore x \ = \ 39 \ \times \ 19 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore x \ = \ 741 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|An algebraic function might read something like:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;t = (1 + n) \times n/2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where t = total and n = the last number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The solution is that, using the largest and the smallest numbers, the numbers are added and then multiplied by the number of different combinations to produce the same result adding the first and last numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
The answer must depend on the number, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{n}{2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; being a whole number. Therefore, the solution will not work for an odd range of numbers, only an even range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Symbols==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are not all the symbols that may be available in TeX Notation for Moodle, just the ones that I have found to work in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \amalg &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\amalg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \cup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \oplus&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\oplus&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \times&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\times&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|\ast&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ast&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|\dagger&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\dagger&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \oslash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\oslash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \triangleleft&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\triangleleft&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \bigcirc&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigcirc&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ddagger&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ddagger&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \otimes&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\otimes&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \triangleright&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\triangleright&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \bigtriangledown&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigtriangledown&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \diamond&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\diamond&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \pm&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\pm&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  	&lt;br /&gt;
| \odot&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\odot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \bigtriangleup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigtriangleup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \div&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\div&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ominus&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ominus&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \wr&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\wr&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \circ&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \wedge&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\wedge&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \vee&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vee&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqcup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sqcup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \leq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\leq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \geq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\geq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \equiv&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\equiv&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \prec&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\prec&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \succ&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\succ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sim&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \perp&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\perp&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \preceq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\preceq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \succeq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\succeq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \simeq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\simeq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \mid&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mid&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ll&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ll&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \gg &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \asymp&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\asymp&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \parallel&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\parallel&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \subset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\subset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \supset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\supset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \subseteq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\subseteq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \supseteq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\supseteq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \approx&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\approx&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \neq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\neq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ni&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ni&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \notin&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\notin&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \in&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ni&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \vdash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vdash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \dashv&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\dashv&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \bullet&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bullet&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \cdot&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cdot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Arrows==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \leftarrow	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \leftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longleftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longleftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Leftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Leftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longleftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longleftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \rightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Rightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \uparrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \uparrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Uparrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Uparrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \downarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \downarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Downarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Downarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \leftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \leftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longleftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longleftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \updownarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \updownarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Updownarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Updownarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \Leftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Leftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longleftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longleftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \leftrightharpoons&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rightleftharpoons&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Im&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Im&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \nearrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \nearrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \nwarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \nwarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \swarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \swarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \searrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \searrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;    &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Delimiters and Maths Constructs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Most delimiters and constructs need additional parameters for them to appear appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \{x&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \{x &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| x | \}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;x | \} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \rangle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rangle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \langle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \langle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \angle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \angle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \=&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \| &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqrt{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sqrt{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqrt[n]{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sqrt[n]{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \frac{ab}{cd}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{ab}{cd}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \backslash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \backslash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \widehat{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \widehat{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \$&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \$ &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \overline{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \overline{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \underline{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \underline{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \therefore&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \therefore&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ddots&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \ddots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \%&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \%&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \#&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \# &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \vdots&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \vdots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \emptyset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \emptyset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
WARNINGS: The &amp;amp; character in LaTeX usually requires a backslash, \. In TeX Notation for Moodle, apparently, it does not. Other packages, AsciiMath, may use it differently again so be careful using it. The copyright character may use the MimeTeX charset, and produces a copyright notice for John Forkosh Associates who provided a lot of the essential packages for the TeX Notation for Moodle, so I understand. I have been, almost reliably, informed that a particular instruction will produce a different notice though .:)    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also a number of characters that can be used in TeX Notation for Moodle but do not render in this page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex08.png|frame|left]] &lt;br /&gt;
| Larger \left(x and \right) brackets&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: cfmimetex06.gif|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| \widetilde{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: cfmimetex09.gif|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| \textdegree or (50)^\circ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Greek Letters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \alpha  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\beta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \beta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gamma&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \gamma &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \delta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\epsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \epsilon &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\zeta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \zeta &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\eta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \eta &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \theta &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\iota&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \iota &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\kappa&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \kappa &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \lambda &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mu&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \mu &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\xi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \xi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\pi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \pi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rho&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \rho &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \sigma &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\tau&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \tau &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\upsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \upsilon &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\phi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \phi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\chi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \chi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\psi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \psi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\omega&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \omega  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Omega&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Omega  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Theta&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Delta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Pi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Pi  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Phi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Phi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Gamma &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Gamma&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Lambda  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Lambda  &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Sigma  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Sigma  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Psi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Psi&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Xi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Xi&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Upsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Upsilon&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vartheta &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \vartheta&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varrho  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varrho&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varphi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varphi &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varsigma &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varsigma&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notable Exceptions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Greek letter omicron (traditionally, mathemeticians don&#039;t make much use of omicron due to possible confusion with zero). Simply put, lowercase omicron is an &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; redered as &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;o&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;. But note \omicron may now work with recent TeX implementations including MathJax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the time of writing, these Greek capital letters cannot be rendered by TeX Notation in Moodle: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alpha, Beta, Zeta, Eta, Tau, Chi, Mu, Iota, Kappa and Epsilon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TeX methematics adopts the convention that lowercase Greek symbols are displayed as italics whereas uppercase Greek symbols are displayed as upright characters. Therefore, the missing Greek capital letters can simply be represented by the \mathrm{ } equivalent &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathrm{A, B, Z, H, T, X, M, I, K, E}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Boolean algebra==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of different conventions for representing Boolean (logic) algebra. Common conventions used in computer science and electronics are detailed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Negation, NOT, ¬, !, ~, &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;−&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \lnot, !, \sim, \overline{ }&lt;br /&gt;
Conjunction, AND, ∧, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cdot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \land, \wedge, \cdot&lt;br /&gt;
Dysjunction, OR, ∨, +, &lt;br /&gt;
 \lor, \vee, +&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive dysjunction, XOR ⊻, ⊕&lt;br /&gt;
 \veebar, \oplus&lt;br /&gt;
Equivalence, If and only if, Iff, ≡, ↔, ⇔&lt;br /&gt;
  \equiv, \leftrightarrow \iff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: two representations of De Morgan&#039;s laws:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;A \cdot B = \overline{\overline{A} + \overline{B}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 $$ A \cdot B = \overline{\overline{A} + \overline{B}} SS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;(A \land B) \equiv \lnot(\lnot{A} \lor \lnot{B})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 $$ (A \land B) \equiv \lnot(\lnot{A} \lor \lnot{B}) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a particular font you need to access the font using the same syntax as demonstrated above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A math calligraphic font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathcal{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathcal{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard bold, a Castellar type font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathbb{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Often used in number theory. For example: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{N}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of natural numbers including 0 {0, 1, 2, 3, ...}, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{Z}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of integers {-..., -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ... }, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{Q}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of rational numbers, including integers, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{R}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of real numbers, which includes the natural numbers, rational numbers and irrational numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fraktur, an Old English type font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathfrak{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathfrak{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is different in Tex Notation in Moodle than it is for other, full, TeX packages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An italic font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathit{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathit{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A normal, upright non-italic, Roman font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathrm{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathrm{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
A bold-face font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathbf{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Size of displays==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default size is rendered slightly larger than normal font size. TeX Notation in Moodle uses eight different sizes ranging from &amp;quot;tiny&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;huge&amp;quot;. However,these values seem to mean different things and are, I suspect, dependent upon the User&#039;s screen resolution. The sizes can be noted in four different ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fontsize{0} to \fontsize{7}&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fontsize{2} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex10.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fs{0} to \fs{7}&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fs{4} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex10.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fs0 to \fs7&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fs6 x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex11c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| As well, you can use \tiny \small &lt;br /&gt;
\normalsize \large \Large &lt;br /&gt;
\LARGE \huge \Huge&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\normalsize x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex11d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that TeX Notation in Moodle now allows \fs6, \fs7, \huge and \Huge to be properly rendered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Colour==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike many scripting languages, we only need to name the colour we want to use. You may have to experiment a little with colours, but it will make for a brighter page. Once named, the entire statement will appear in the colour, and if you mix colours, the last named colour will dominate. Some examples: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \red x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30a.gif|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \blue x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30b.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \green x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30c.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \red x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2}$$ $$ \times $$ &lt;br /&gt;
$$\green (y \ + \ 12) $$ $$ \ = $$ $$ \ \blue 6^3 $$ &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30d.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle 2.2 note: You may find this doesn&#039;t work for you. You can try to add &amp;quot;\usepackage{color}&amp;quot; to your tex notation setting &amp;quot;LaTeX preamble&amp;quot; (under Site adminstration/Plugins/Filters/TeX notation)and then use this new syntax: $$ \color{red} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may note this last one, it is considerably more complex than the previous for colours. TeX Notation in Windows does not allow multicoloured equations, if you name a number of colours in the equation, only the last named will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Geometric Shapes== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to produce geometric shapes, one is with circles and the other is with lines. Each take a bit of practice to get right, but they can provide some simple geometry. It may be easier to produce the shapes in Illustrator or Paint Shop Pro or any one of a number of other drawing packages and use them to illustrate your lessons, but sometimes, some simple diagrams in Moodle will do a better job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Circles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circles are easy to make. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex20.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Circles are easily created, and only needs a number to determine how large the circle is. &lt;br /&gt;
To create the circle use $$ \circle(150) $$. This makes a circle of 150 pixels in diameter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arcs are also easy to produce, but require some additional parameters. The same code structure used in circles create the basic shape, but the inclusion of a start and end point creates only the arc. However, notice where the 0 point is, not at the true North, but rather the East and run in an anti-clockwise direction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;90,180)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21b.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;0,90)$$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;180,270)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;270,360)$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This structure breaks down into the \circle command followed by the diameter, not the radius, of the circle, followed by a semi-colon, then the demarcation of the arc, the nomination of the start and end points in degrees from the 0, East, start point. Note that the canvas is the size of the diameter nominated by the circle&#039;s parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The \picture Command==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using circles and arcs as shown above is somewhat limiting. The \picture command allows you to use a frame in which to build a picture of many layers. Each part of the picture though needs to be in its own space, and while this frame allows you to be creative, to a degree, there are some very hard and fast rules about using it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All elements of a picture need to be located within the picture frame. Unexpected results occur when parts of an arc, for example, runs over the border of the frame. (This is particularly true of lines, which we will get to next, and the consequences of that overstepping of the border can cause serious problems.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The \picture command is structured like:&lt;br /&gt;
   \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(200)}}&lt;br /&gt;
   \command(size of frame){(x co-ordinate, y co-ordinate){\shape to draw(size or x co-ordinate, y co-ordinate)})  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The brace is used to enclose each set of required starting point coordinates. Inside each set of braces, another set of braces is used to isolate each set of coordinates from the other, and those coordinates use their proper brackets and backslash. Count the opening and closing brackets, be careful of the position,       &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(200)}}&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The picture frame brings elements together that you may not otherwise see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the frame size of 100px and the centre point of the circle in the mid-point of the frame, the 200px circle will be squashed. Unexpected results occur when sizes are not correct.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24b.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Using the picture frame, you can layer circles &lt;br /&gt;
and lines over each other, or they can intersect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(99)} (50,50){\circle(80)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| You may want to see an image of a circle with a dot in the middle. &lt;br /&gt;
You may have to try to place the centre dot correctly , but the &lt;br /&gt;
ordering of the elements in the image may have an impact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(100){(48,46){\bullet}(50,50){\circle(99)}} $$ &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Using the same ideas as above, you can make semi-circles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(150){(50,50){\circle(100;0,180)}(100,50){\circle(100;180,360)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lines==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; Drawing lines in TeX Notation in Moodle is an issue, go to the [[Using_TeX_Notation#Reserved_Characters_and_Keywords| Using Text Notation]] for more information. If the line is not noted properly then the parser will try to correctly draw the line but will not successfully complete it. This means that every image that needs be drawn will be drawn until it hits the error. When the error is being converted, it fails, so no subsequent image is drawn. Be careful and make sure your line works BEFORE you move to the next problem or next image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex26.gif|frame|left| a couple of lines]] &lt;br /&gt;
| $$\red \picture(200){(20,0){ \line(180,0)}{(20,180){\line(180,0}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The structure of the picture box is that the \picture(200) provides a square image template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The (20,0) provides the starting coordinates for any line that comes after. In this case the start point is at 20pixels in the x axis and 0 pixels in the y axis. The starting point for all coordinates, 0,0, is the bottom left corner and they run in a clockwise manner. &#039;&#039;&#039;Do not confuse this with arcs.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The \line(180,0) determines the length and inclination of the line. In this case, the inclination is 0 and the length is 180px. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are enclosed in braces, all inside one set of braces owned by the \picture() control sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next set of commands are the same, that is, the (20,200) are the coordinates of the next line. The x co-ordinate is the 20, that is the distance to the right from the 0 point. The y co-ordinates is the distance from the bottom of the image. Whereas the first line started and ran on the bottom of the picture frame, the y co-ordinate starts at the 200 pixel mark from the bottom of the image. The line, at 180 pixels long and has no y slope. This creates a spread pair of parallel lines.     &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimtex27.gif|thumb|right|150px|\picture explained]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this explains the structure of a line, there is a couple of elements that you need to go through to do more with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Squares and Rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
Drawing squares and rectangles is similar, but only slightly different. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There should be a square box tool, and there is, but unless it has something inside it, it does not display. It is actually easier to make a square using the \line command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line03.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|This box is constructed using:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}(10,10){\line(230,0)}(240,10){\line(0,230)}(10,240){\line(230,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
It is a 250 pixel square box with a 230 pixel square inside it.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line04.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|This box is different in that is has the equal length indicators that are used in a square.&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}&lt;br /&gt;
(5,120){\line(10,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(10,10){\line(230,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(120,5){\line(0,10)}&lt;br /&gt;
(240,10){\line(0,230)}&lt;br /&gt;
(235,120){\line(10,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(10,240){\line(230,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(120,235){\line(0,10)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line05.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| The rectangle then becomes the same thing, but with one side shorter. For a portrait canvas it would be:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}(10,10){\line(150,0)}(160,10){\line(0,230)}(10,240){\line(150,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line06.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|The rectangle can also produce a landscape shape:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,160)}(10,10){\line(230,0)}(240,10){\line(0,160)}(10,170){\line(230,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Controlling Angles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Controlling angles is a little different. They involve a different perception, but not one that is unfamiliar. Consider this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have a point from which we want to draw a line that is on an angle. The notation used at this point can be positive, positive or positive, negative or negative, positive or negative, negative. Think of it like a number plane or a graph, using directed numbers. The 0,0 point is in the centre, and we have four quadrants around it that give us one of the previously mentioned results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;|[[Image:co-ordquadrants.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06a.gif|left]] $$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,45)}}$$, &lt;br /&gt;
a positive x and positive y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06b.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(-40,45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a negative x and positive y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06c.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(-40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a negative x and negative y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06d.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a positive x and a negative y&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentially, what these points boil down to is that anything above the insertion point is a positive on the y axis, anything below is a negative. Anything to the left of the insertion point is a negative while everything to the right is a positive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:line06e.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,45)}(50,50){\line(-40,45)}(50,50){\line(-40,-45)}(50,50){\line(40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The co-ordinate alignment process in TeX is not that good that you can use one set of co-ords as a single starting point for all lines. The layering of each object varies because of the position of the previous object, so each object needs to be exactly placed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This co-ord structure has a great deal of impact on intersecting lines, parallel lines and triangles. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Intersecting Lines==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set up an intersecting pair easily enough, using the \picture control sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex31.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \picture(200){(10,0){\line(150,150)} (0,130){\line(180,-180)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lines that are drawn can be labeled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(200){(10,0){\line(150,150)}(0,130){\line(180,-180)}&lt;br /&gt;
(0,10){A}(0,135){B}(140,0){C}(140,150){D}(62,80){X}} $$ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To produce another image.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex32.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;| To which you may want to ask the question: &lt;br /&gt;
$$The \ \angle \ of \ AXB \ is \ 72\textdegree. \ What \ is \ the \ value \ of \ \angle BXD? $$&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Image: cfmimetex32a.gif|center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Labeling this image, above-right, turned out to be fairly simple. Offsetting points by a few pixels at the start or end points of the lines proved a successful strategy. The X point proved a little more problematic, and took a number of adjustments before getting it right. Experience here will help.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| With labels the drawing can become a little more like your traditional geometric drawing, but the devil is in the details. The parallel markers need to be placed properly, and that is where experience really comes into it. On lines that are vertical or horizontal, you can get away with using the &amp;gt; or &amp;lt; directly from the keyboard, or the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ll&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  symbols. In either case, you need to position them properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code:&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(200){(15,45){\line(170,0)} (15,30){c}(170,28){d}(15,160){\line(170,0)}(15,145){e}(180,143){f}(50,20){\line(110,175)}(58,20){a}(140,185){b}(42,32){\kappa}(53,48){\beta}&lt;br /&gt;
(150,165){\kappa}&lt;br /&gt;
(90,38){\gg}(80,153){\gg}&lt;br /&gt;
}$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line10.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lines and Arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combining lines and arcs is a serious challenge actually, on a number of levels. For example lets take an arc from the first page on circles.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex21a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Fairly innocuous of itself, but when we start to add in elements, it changes dramatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \circle(120;90,180) $$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line12.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\picture(150){(75,75){\circle(120;90,180)}(75,75){\line(-70,0)}(75,75){\line(0,75)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
All elements in this drawing start in the same place. Each is layered, and properly placed on the canvas, and using the same co-ord to start makes it easy to control them. No matter the size of the arc, intersecting lines can all be drawn using the centre co-ords of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Triangles == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of all the drawing objects, it is actually triangles that present the most challenge. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line13.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(350){(10,10){\line(0,320)}(10,330){\line(330,0)}(10,10){\line(330,320)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|This is a simple triangle, one that allows us to establish a simple set of rules for the sides. The vertical always has an x=0 co-ord and the horizontal always has a y=0 co-ord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case with an x value of 330 on the horizontal, and a y value of 320 on the vertical, the hypotenuse should then have a value of x=340, and the y=330, but not so, they actually have an x=330 and a y=320.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need to add the starting point co-ords to the x and y values of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line14.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
$$picture(350){(10,10){\line(330,0)}(340,10){\line(0,320)}(340,330){\line(-330,-320)}}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This triangle has been developed for a Trigonometry page - but the additional notation should provide insight into how you can use it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line16.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| This is a labeled image, but it has an \fbox in it with its little line. With some effort, it could be replaced with two intersecting short lines.&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(350,150){(25,25){\line(300,0)}(325,25){\line(0,110)}(25,25){\line(300,110)}(309,25){\fbox{\line(5,5)}}&lt;br /&gt;
(307,98){\theta}(135,75){\beta}(150,5){\alpha}(335,75){\epsilon}}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The triangle shows like: &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:trig01.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|We use the different elements of the triangle to identify those things we need to know about a right-angled triangle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hypotenuse is always the side that is opposite the right angle. The longest side is always the Hypotenuse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To identify the other elements of the triangle we look for the sign &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the starting point for naming the other sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side that is opposite &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is known as the Opposite. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side that lies alongside &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is known as the Adjacent side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To determine which is which, draw a line that bisects &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and whatever line it crosses is the Opposite side. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| The code:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(350,250){(25,25){\line(300,0)}(25,25){\line(0,220)}(25,245){\line(300,-220)}(310,25){\circle(100;135,180)}(20,100){\line(310,-75)} (25,25){\fbox{\line(5,5)}}(25,25){\line(150,150)}(165,140){Hypotenuse}(120,2){Adjacent}(2,80){\rotatebox{90}{Opposite}}(270,40){\theta}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Matrices=&lt;br /&gt;
A Matrix is a rectangular array of numbers arranged in rows and columns which can be used to organize numeric information. Matrices can be used to predict trends and outcomes in real situations - i.e. polling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
A matrix can be written and displayed like [[Image: matrices03.gif|A matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the matrix is constructed using the brackets before creating the array:&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ M = \left[\begin{array}{ccc} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
The internal structure of the array is generated by the &amp;amp;, ampersand, and the double backslash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also create a grid for the matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|A dashed line&lt;br /&gt;
|A solid line&lt;br /&gt;
|A mixed line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices04.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices05.gif]]	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices06.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c.c.c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c|c|c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c.c|c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command sequences here are the {c|c.c} and \hdash and \hline. The pipe, |, and the full stop determine the line type for the vertical line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matrices also respond to other TeX Notation commands such as size and colour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Colour&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|Size&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices07.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices08.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices09.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\blue&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\fs7&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\fs2&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating equal and unequal matrices==&lt;br /&gt;
Equal and unequal matrices are simply matrices that either share or not share the same number of rows and columns. To be more precise, equal matrices share the same order and each element in the corresponding positions are equal. Anything else is unequal matrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Actually equal and unequal matrices are constructed along similar lines, but have different shapes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Equal Matrix&lt;br /&gt;
|An unequal matrix&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices10.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices11.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \left[\begin{array} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] \ = \ \left[\begin{array} 12&amp;amp;11&amp;amp;z \ 10&amp;amp;9&amp;amp;y \ 8&amp;amp;7&amp;amp;x\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \left[\begin{array} a&amp;amp;b \ c&amp;amp;d \ e&amp;amp;f \end{array}\right] \ \neq \ \left[\begin{array} 12&amp;amp;11&amp;amp;z \ 10&amp;amp;9&amp;amp;y \ 8&amp;amp;7&amp;amp;x\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Labeling a Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Addition and subtraction matrices are similar again, but the presentation is usually very different. The problem comes when trying to mix labels into arrays. The lack of sophistication in the TeX Notation plays against it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle allows an easy adoption of tables to make it work though. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Bill the baker supplies three shops, A, B and C with pies, pasties and sausage rolls. &lt;br /&gt;
  He is expected to determine the stock levels of those three shops in his estimation of supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is better to use the Moodle Fullscreen editor for this, to have a better idea of how the end product will look and to take advantage of the additional tools available. Design decisions need occupy our attention for a while. We need a table of five rows and four columns. The first row is a header row, so the label is centred. The next row needs four columns, a blank cell to start and labels A, B and C. The next three rows are divided into two columns, with the labels, pies, pasties and sausage rolls in each row of the first column and the matrix resides in a merged set of columns there. So first the table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert Table - initial properties&lt;br /&gt;
| Merge Cells Button&lt;br /&gt;
| Advanced Properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[[Image: matricestable01.png|Table properties]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: matricestable02.png | Merge cells]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: matricestable03.png | Cell properties button]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| You may need to look into the Advanced properties setting of the tables and cells to make this work.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the immediate result: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable04.png | The resulting table]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While not a very good look, it can be made better by tweaking the table using the advanced settings and properties buttons and then you can tweak the matrix itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tweaking the Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable05a.png | A tweaked matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Things are not always as they seem, be aware, the &amp;quot;c&amp;quot; does not stand for &amp;quot;column&amp;quot;, it actually stands for &amp;quot;centre&amp;quot;. The columns are aligned by the letters l, for left, c for centre and r for right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each column is spread across 50 pixels, so the value of 50 is entered into the alignment declaration. The plus sign before the value is used to &amp;quot;propogate&amp;quot; or to force the value across the whole matrix, but is not used when wanting to separate only one column. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the rows is a little more problematic. The capital letter C sets the vertical alignment to the centre, (B is for baseline, but that does not guarantee that the numbers will appear on the base line, and there does not appear to be any third value). The plus sign and following value sets the height of all rows to the number given. In this I have given it a value of 25 pixels for the entire matrix. If there were four or five rows, the same height requirement is made. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order things appear is also important. If you change the order of these settings, they will either not work at all, or will not render as you expect them to. If something does not work properly, then check to make sure you have the right order first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==An Addition Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rule for performing operations on matrices is that they must be equal matrices. For example, addition matrices look like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable06.png | An addition matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
with the results obvious. The code is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  11&amp;amp;14&amp;amp;12 \ \hdash16&amp;amp;12&amp;amp;22 \ \hdash 14&amp;amp;17&amp;amp;15&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] + \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  60&amp;amp;60&amp;amp;60 \ \hdash 40&amp;amp;40&amp;amp;30 \ \hdash 30&amp;amp;30&amp;amp;30&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A Subtraction Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to an addition matrix in its construction, the subtraction matrix is subject to the same rules of equality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the same essential data, we can calculate the daily sales of each of the shops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable07.png | A subtraction matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code is:&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  72&amp;amp;95&amp;amp;68 \ \hdash 54&amp;amp;61&amp;amp;65 \ \hdash 48&amp;amp;51&amp;amp;60&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] - \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  11&amp;amp;14&amp;amp;12 \ \hdash 16&amp;amp;12&amp;amp;22 \ \hdash 14&amp;amp;17&amp;amp;15&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] = \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  61&amp;amp;81&amp;amp;56 \ \hdash 38&amp;amp;49&amp;amp;43 \ \hdash 34&amp;amp;34&amp;amp;48&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] $$  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This code looks more complex than it really is, it is cluttered by the lines and alignment sequences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiplication Matrices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different than the addition or subtraction matrices, the multiplication matrix comes in three parts, the row matrix, the column matrix and the answer matrix. This implies it has a different construction methodology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matrices16.gif | A multiplication matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And the code for this is: &lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \begin{array} 10&amp;amp;amp;14&amp;amp;amp;16\end{array} \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \left[\begin{array} 45 \\ 61 \\ 19 \end{array}\right] &lt;br /&gt;
  \ = \ \begin{array} 450&amp;amp;amp;854&amp;amp;amp;304\end{array} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While different, it is not necessarily more complex. For example a problem like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Bill the baker is selling his product to Con the cafe owner, who &lt;br /&gt;
  wants to make sure his overall prices are profitable for himself. &lt;br /&gt;
  Con needs to make sure that his average price is providing sufficient &lt;br /&gt;
  profit to be able to keep the cafes open. Con makes his calculations &lt;br /&gt;
  on a weekly basis, comparing cost to sale prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the pies, pasties and sausage rolls in that order he applies them to the cost and sale price columns :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matrices17.gif | A multiplication matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code for this is: &lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left[\begin{array} 350&amp;amp;amp;310&amp;amp;amp;270 \end{array}\right] \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \left[\begin{array} \$2.10&amp;amp;amp;\$3.60 \ \$2.05&amp;amp;amp;\$3.60 \ \$1.90&amp;amp;amp;\$3.10 \end{array} &lt;br /&gt;
  \right] \ = \ \left[\begin{array} \$735.00&amp;amp;amp;\$1260.00 \ \$635.50&amp;amp;amp;\$1116.00 \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \$513.00&amp;amp;amp;$\837.00 \end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See Also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MathJax_filter]] - available in Moodle 2.7 and later&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TeX notation filter]] To turn on the TeX Notation &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced Maths Tools]] Moodle 2.x - The Next Generation of TeX Tools&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DragMath equation editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chemistry notation using mhchem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Mathematics]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_TeX_Notation&amp;diff=120301</id>
		<title>Using TeX Notation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Using_TeX_Notation&amp;diff=120301"/>
		<updated>2015-10-30T09:59:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: pronunciation&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Filters}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
TeX (&#039;&#039;&#039;/&#039;tɛx/tekh&#039;&#039;&#039; often pronounced TeK in English)  is a very widespread and popular way of representing Mathematics notation using only characters that you can type on a keyboard (see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TeX Wikipedia]).  This makes it a useful format to use in Moodle, since it can be entered anywhere you can type text, from forum posts to quiz questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TeX expressions can be entered in multiple ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* typing them directly into texts.&lt;br /&gt;
* using the Java-based Dragmath editor in Moodle&#039;s TinyMCE editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* using the HTML-based equation editor in Moodle&#039;s Atto editor (since Moodle 2.7).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afterwards, TeX expressions are rendered into Mathematics notation:&lt;br /&gt;
* using the TeX filter in Moodle, which uses a TeX binary installed on the server to convert expressions into .gif images (or if that is not available, it falls back to a simple built-in mimetex binary).&lt;br /&gt;
* using the [[MathJax_filter]] which identifies TeX expressions and uses the Mathjax JS library to render them in browsers at display time (since Moodle 2.7).&lt;br /&gt;
* using other third-party solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can imagine, the whole field is not simple as we&#039;d like, especially because there are many flavours of TeX and slight variations between tools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page focusses only on using TeX in core Moodle.  See the links at the bottom of this page for more information on setting up TeX editors and filters, including other tools from the Moodle community that may be suitable for advanced users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING:&#039;&#039;&#039; This Wiki environment uses a DIFFERENT TeX renderer to Moodle, especially when it comes to control sequences.  For this reason images are sometimes used to represent what it should look like in Moodle.   YMMV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Language Conventions== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a TeX sequence in your text, surround it with $$ markers. To invoke a particular command or control sequence, use the backslash, \. A typical control sequence looks like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ x\ =\ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2}\ \times\ (y\ +\ 12) $$  &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex10.gif|frame|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fraction and square root.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional spaces can be placed into the equation using the \ without a trailing character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reserved Characters and Keywords==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most characters and numbers on the keyboard can be used at their default value. As with any computing language, though, there are a set of reserved characters and keywords that are used by the program for its own purposes. TeX Notation is no different, but it does have a very small set of Reserved Characters. This will not be a complete list of reserved characters, but some of these are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  @ # $ % ^ &amp;amp; * ( ) . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use these characters in an equation just place the \ in front of them like \$ or \%. If you want to use the backslash, just use \backslash. The only exception here seems to be the &amp;amp;, ampersand. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Superscripts, Subscripts and Roots==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Superscripts are recorded using the caret, ^, symbol. An example for a Maths class might be: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 4^2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = 4^5 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  This is a shorthand way of saying: &lt;br /&gt;
  (4 x 4) x (4 x 4 x 4) = (4 x 4 x 4 x 4 x 4)&lt;br /&gt;
  or&lt;br /&gt;
  16 x 64 = 1024.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4^2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = 4^5&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subscripts are similar, but use the underscore character. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 3x_2 \ \times \ 2x_3 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;3x_2 \ \times \ 2x_3&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is OK if you want superscripts or subscripts, but square roots are a little different. This uses a control sequence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \sqrt{64} \ = \ 8 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sqrt{64} \ = \ 8&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also take this a little further, but adding in a control character. You may ask a question like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ If \ \sqrt[n]{1024} \ = \ 4, \ what \ is \ the \ value \ of \ n? $$  &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;If \ \sqrt[n]{1024} \ = \ 4, \ what \ is \ the \ value \ of \ n?&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using these different commands allows you to develop equations like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ The \sqrt{64} \ \times \ 2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = \ 1024 $$&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;The \sqrt{64} \ \times \ 2 \ \times \ 4^3 \ = \ 1024&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Superscripts, Subscripts and roots can also be noted in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fractions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fractions in TeX are actually simple, as long as you remember the rules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \frac{numerator}{denominator} $$ which produces &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{numerator}{denominator}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be given as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{5}{10} \ is \ equal \ to \ \frac{1}{2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is entered as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \frac{5}{10} \ is \ equal \ to \ \frac{1}{2}.$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With fractions (as with other commands) the curly brackets can be nested so that for example you can implement negative exponents in fractions.  As you can see,&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\frac {5^{-2}}{3}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac {5^{-2}}{3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^{-3}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\left(\frac{3}{4}\right)^{-3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  and&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\frac{3}{4^{-3}}$$ will produce &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{3}{4^{-3}} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  You likely do not want to use $$\frac{3}{4}^{-3}$$ as it produces &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{3}{4}^{-3}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use fractions and negative exponents in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Brackets==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As students advance through Maths, they come into contact with brackets. Algebraic notation depends heavily on brackets. The usual keyboard values of ( and ) are useful, for example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;d = 2 \ \times \ (4 \ - \ j)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is written as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ d = 2 \ \times \ (4 \ - \ j) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, these brackets are enough for most formulae but they will not be in some circumstances. Consider this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4x^3 \ + \ (x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is OK, but try it this way:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;4x^3 \ + \ \left(x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4}\right)&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be achieved by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ 4x^3 \ + \ \left(x \ + \ \frac{42}{1 + x^4}\right) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A simple change using the \left( and \right) symbols instead. Note the actual bracket is both named and presented. Brackets are almost essential in [[Using TeX Notation 4 | Matrices]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ellipsis==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ellipsis is a simple code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;x_1, \ x_2, \ \ldots, \ x_n&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Written like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ x_1, \ x_2, \ \ldots, \ x_n  $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A more practical application could be:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Question:&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;quot;Add together all the numbers from 1 &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ldots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; 38.&lt;br /&gt;
  What is an elegant and simple solution to this problem?&lt;br /&gt;
  Can you create an algebraic function to explain this solution?&lt;br /&gt;
  Will your solution work for all numbers?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answer:&lt;br /&gt;
The question uses an even number to demonstrate a mathematical process and generate an algebraic formula.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class = &amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 1:&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 2.&lt;br /&gt;
| Part 3.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;1. \ 1 \ + \ 38 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2. \ 2 \ + \ 37 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;3. \ 3 \ + \ 36 \ = \ 39&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ldots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;19. 19 \ + \ 20 \ = \ 39 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore x \ = \ 39 \ \times \ 19 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\therefore x \ = \ 741 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|An algebraic function might read something like:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;t = (1 + n) \times n/2 &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where t = total and n = the last number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The solution is that, using the largest and the smallest numbers, the numbers are added and then multiplied by the number of different combinations to produce the same result adding the first and last numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
The answer must depend on the number, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\frac{n}{2}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; being a whole number. Therefore, the solution will not work for an odd range of numbers, only an even range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Symbols==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are not all the symbols that may be available in TeX Notation for Moodle, just the ones that I have found to work in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \amalg &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\amalg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \cup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \oplus&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\oplus&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \times&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\times&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|\ast&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ast&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|\dagger&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\dagger&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \oslash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\oslash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \triangleleft&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\triangleleft&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \bigcirc&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigcirc&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ddagger&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ddagger&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \otimes&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\otimes&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \triangleright&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\triangleright&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \bigtriangledown&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigtriangledown&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \diamond&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\diamond&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \pm&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\pm&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  	&lt;br /&gt;
| \odot&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\odot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \bigtriangleup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bigtriangleup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \div&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\div&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ominus&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ominus&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \wr&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\wr&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \circ&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\circ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \wedge&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\wedge&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \vee&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vee&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqcup&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sqcup&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \leq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\leq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \geq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\geq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \equiv&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\equiv&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \prec&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\prec&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \succ&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\succ&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sim&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \perp&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\perp&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \preceq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\preceq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \succeq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\succeq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \simeq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\simeq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \mid&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mid&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ll&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ll&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \gg &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \asymp&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\asymp&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \parallel&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\parallel&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \subset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\subset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \supset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\supset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \subseteq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\subseteq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \supseteq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\supseteq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \approx&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\approx&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \neq&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\neq&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ni&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ni&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \notin&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\notin&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \in&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ni&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| \vdash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vdash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \dashv&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\dashv&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \bullet&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\bullet&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \cdot&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cdot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Arrows==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \leftarrow	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \leftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longleftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longleftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Leftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Leftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longleftarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longleftarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \rightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Rightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Rightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \uparrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \uparrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Uparrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Uparrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \downarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \downarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Downarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Downarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \leftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \leftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \longleftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \longleftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \updownarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \updownarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Updownarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Updownarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \Leftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Leftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Longleftrightarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Longleftrightarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \leftrightharpoons&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rightleftharpoons&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \Im&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \Im&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \nearrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \nearrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \nwarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \nwarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \swarrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \swarrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \searrow&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \searrow&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;    &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Delimiters and Maths Constructs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Most delimiters and constructs need additional parameters for them to appear appropriately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \{x&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \{x &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| x | \}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;x | \} &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \rangle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \rangle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \langle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \langle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \angle&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \angle &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \=&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \| &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqrt{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sqrt{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \sqrt[n]{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \sqrt[n]{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \frac{ab}{cd}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \frac{ab}{cd}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \backslash&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \backslash&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \widehat{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \widehat{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \$&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \$ &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \overline{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \overline{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \underline{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \underline{ab}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \therefore&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \therefore&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \ddots&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \ddots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \%&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \%&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \#&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \# &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \vdots&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \vdots&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
| \emptyset&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt; \emptyset&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
WARNINGS: The &amp;amp; character in LaTeX usually requires a backslash, \. In TeX Notation for Moodle, apparently, it does not. Other packages, AsciiMath, may use it differently again so be careful using it. The copyright character may use the MimeTeX charset, and produces a copyright notice for John Forkosh Associates who provided a lot of the essential packages for the TeX Notation for Moodle, so I understand. I have been, almost reliably, informed that a particular instruction will produce a different notice though .:)    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also a number of characters that can be used in TeX Notation for Moodle but do not render in this page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex08.png|frame|left]] &lt;br /&gt;
| Larger \left(x and \right) brackets&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: cfmimetex06.gif|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| \widetilde{ab}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: cfmimetex09.gif|frame|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| \textdegree or (50)^\circ&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Greek Letters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\alpha&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \alpha  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\beta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \beta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gamma&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \gamma &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \delta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\epsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \epsilon &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\zeta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \zeta &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\eta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \eta &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \theta &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\iota&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \iota &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\kappa&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \kappa &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lambda&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \lambda &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mu&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \mu &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\xi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \xi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\pi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \pi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\rho&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \rho &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\sigma&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \sigma &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\tau&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \tau &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\upsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \upsilon &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\phi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \phi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\chi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \chi &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\psi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \psi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\omega&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \omega  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Omega&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Omega  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Theta&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Delta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Delta  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Pi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Pi  	&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Phi&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Phi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Gamma &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Gamma&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Lambda  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Lambda  &lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Sigma  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Sigma  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Psi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Psi&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Xi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Xi&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Upsilon&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \Upsilon&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\vartheta &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \vartheta&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varrho  &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varrho&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varphi &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varphi &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\varsigma &amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| \varsigma&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Notable Exceptions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Greek letter omicron (traditionally, mathemeticians don&#039;t make much use of omicron due to possible confusion with zero). Simply put, lowercase omicron is an &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; redered as &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;o&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;. But note \omicron may now work with recent TeX implementations including MathJax.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the time of writing, these Greek capital letters cannot be rendered by TeX Notation in Moodle: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alpha, Beta, Zeta, Eta, Tau, Chi, Mu, Iota, Kappa and Epsilon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TeX methematics adopts the convention that lowercase Greek symbols are displayed as italics whereas uppercase Greek symbols are displayed as upright characters. Therefore, the missing Greek capital letters can simply be represented by the \mathrm{ } equivalent &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathrm{A, B, Z, H, T, X, M, I, K, E}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Boolean algebra==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of different conventions for representing Boolean (logic) algebra. Common conventions used in computer science and electronics are detailed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Negation, NOT, ¬, !, ~, &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;−&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \lnot, !, \sim, \overline{ }&lt;br /&gt;
Conjunction, AND, ∧, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\cdot&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \land, \wedge, \cdot&lt;br /&gt;
Dysjunction, OR, ∨, +, &lt;br /&gt;
 \lor, \vee, +&lt;br /&gt;
Exclusive dysjunction, XOR ⊻, ⊕&lt;br /&gt;
 \veebar, \oplus&lt;br /&gt;
Equivalence, If and only if, Iff, ≡, ↔, ⇔&lt;br /&gt;
  \equiv, \leftrightarrow \iff&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example: two representations of De Morgan&#039;s laws:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;A \cdot B = \overline{\overline{A} + \overline{B}}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 $$ A \cdot B = \overline{\overline{A} + \overline{B}} SS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;(A \land B) \equiv \lnot(\lnot{A} \lor \lnot{B})&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 $$ (A \land B) \equiv \lnot(\lnot{A} \lor \lnot{B}) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Fonts==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a particular font you need to access the font using the same syntax as demonstrated above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A math calligraphic font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathcal{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathcal{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blackboard bold, a Castellar type font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathbb{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Often used in number theory. For example: &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{N}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of natural numbers including 0 {0, 1, 2, 3, ...}, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{Z}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of integers {-..., -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ... }, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{Q}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of rational numbers, including integers, &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbb{R}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; = set of real numbers, which includes the natural numbers, rational numbers and irrational numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fraktur, an Old English type font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathfrak{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathfrak{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is different in Tex Notation in Moodle than it is for other, full, TeX packages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An italic font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathit{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathit{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A normal, upright non-italic, Roman font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathrm{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathrm{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
A bold-face font:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\mathbf{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ}&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \mathbf{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Size of displays==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default size is rendered slightly larger than normal font size. TeX Notation in Moodle uses eight different sizes ranging from &amp;quot;tiny&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;huge&amp;quot;. However,these values seem to mean different things and are, I suspect, dependent upon the User&#039;s screen resolution. The sizes can be noted in four different ways: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fontsize{0} to \fontsize{7}&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fontsize{2} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex10.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fs{0} to \fs{7}&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fs{4} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex10.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \fs0 to \fs7&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\fs6 x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex11c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| As well, you can use \tiny \small &lt;br /&gt;
\normalsize \large \Large &lt;br /&gt;
\LARGE \huge \Huge&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\normalsize x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex11d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It appears that TeX Notation in Moodle now allows \fs6, \fs7, \huge and \Huge to be properly rendered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Colour==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike many scripting languages, we only need to name the colour we want to use. You may have to experiment a little with colours, but it will make for a brighter page. Once named, the entire statement will appear in the colour, and if you mix colours, the last named colour will dominate. Some examples: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \red x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30a.gif|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \blue x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30b.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \green x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30c.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \red x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2}$$ $$ \times $$ &lt;br /&gt;
$$\green (y \ + \ 12) $$ $$ \ = $$ $$ \ \blue 6^3 $$ &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex30d.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle 2.2 note: You may find this doesn&#039;t work for you. You can try to add &amp;quot;\usepackage{color}&amp;quot; to your tex notation setting &amp;quot;LaTeX preamble&amp;quot; (under Site adminstration/Plugins/Filters/TeX notation)and then use this new syntax: $$ \color{red} x \ = \ \frac{\sqrt{144}}{2} \ \times \ (y \ + \ 12) $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may note this last one, it is considerably more complex than the previous for colours. TeX Notation in Windows does not allow multicoloured equations, if you name a number of colours in the equation, only the last named will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Geometric Shapes== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to produce geometric shapes, one is with circles and the other is with lines. Each take a bit of practice to get right, but they can provide some simple geometry. It may be easier to produce the shapes in Illustrator or Paint Shop Pro or any one of a number of other drawing packages and use them to illustrate your lessons, but sometimes, some simple diagrams in Moodle will do a better job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Circles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circles are easy to make. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex20.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Circles are easily created, and only needs a number to determine how large the circle is. &lt;br /&gt;
To create the circle use $$ \circle(150) $$. This makes a circle of 150 pixels in diameter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating Arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arcs are also easy to produce, but require some additional parameters. The same code structure used in circles create the basic shape, but the inclusion of a start and end point creates only the arc. However, notice where the 0 point is, not at the true North, but rather the East and run in an anti-clockwise direction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;90,180)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21b.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;0,90)$$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;180,270)$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex21d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \circle(120;270,360)$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This structure breaks down into the \circle command followed by the diameter, not the radius, of the circle, followed by a semi-colon, then the demarcation of the arc, the nomination of the start and end points in degrees from the 0, East, start point. Note that the canvas is the size of the diameter nominated by the circle&#039;s parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The \picture Command==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using circles and arcs as shown above is somewhat limiting. The \picture command allows you to use a frame in which to build a picture of many layers. Each part of the picture though needs to be in its own space, and while this frame allows you to be creative, to a degree, there are some very hard and fast rules about using it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All elements of a picture need to be located within the picture frame. Unexpected results occur when parts of an arc, for example, runs over the border of the frame. (This is particularly true of lines, which we will get to next, and the consequences of that overstepping of the border can cause serious problems.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The \picture command is structured like:&lt;br /&gt;
   \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(200)}}&lt;br /&gt;
   \command(size of frame){(x co-ordinate, y co-ordinate){\shape to draw(size or x co-ordinate, y co-ordinate)})  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; The brace is used to enclose each set of required starting point coordinates. Inside each set of braces, another set of braces is used to isolate each set of coordinates from the other, and those coordinates use their proper brackets and backslash. Count the opening and closing brackets, be careful of the position,       &lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(200)}}&amp;amp;&amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The picture frame brings elements together that you may not otherwise see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the frame size of 100px and the centre point of the circle in the mid-point of the frame, the 200px circle will be squashed. Unexpected results occur when sizes are not correct.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24b.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Using the picture frame, you can layer circles &lt;br /&gt;
and lines over each other, or they can intersect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(100){(50,50){\circle(99)} (50,50){\circle(80)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24c.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| You may want to see an image of a circle with a dot in the middle. &lt;br /&gt;
You may have to try to place the centre dot correctly , but the &lt;br /&gt;
ordering of the elements in the image may have an impact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(100){(48,46){\bullet}(50,50){\circle(99)}} $$ &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex24d.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Using the same ideas as above, you can make semi-circles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(150){(50,50){\circle(100;0,180)}(100,50){\circle(100;180,360)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lines==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning:&#039;&#039;&#039; Drawing lines in TeX Notation in Moodle is an issue, go to the [[Using_TeX_Notation#Reserved_Characters_and_Keywords| Using Text Notation]] for more information. If the line is not noted properly then the parser will try to correctly draw the line but will not successfully complete it. This means that every image that needs be drawn will be drawn until it hits the error. When the error is being converted, it fails, so no subsequent image is drawn. Be careful and make sure your line works BEFORE you move to the next problem or next image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex26.gif|frame|left| a couple of lines]] &lt;br /&gt;
| $$\red \picture(200){(20,0){ \line(180,0)}{(20,180){\line(180,0}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The structure of the picture box is that the \picture(200) provides a square image template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The (20,0) provides the starting coordinates for any line that comes after. In this case the start point is at 20pixels in the x axis and 0 pixels in the y axis. The starting point for all coordinates, 0,0, is the bottom left corner and they run in a clockwise manner. &#039;&#039;&#039;Do not confuse this with arcs.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The \line(180,0) determines the length and inclination of the line. In this case, the inclination is 0 and the length is 180px. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are enclosed in braces, all inside one set of braces owned by the \picture() control sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The next set of commands are the same, that is, the (20,200) are the coordinates of the next line. The x co-ordinate is the 20, that is the distance to the right from the 0 point. The y co-ordinates is the distance from the bottom of the image. Whereas the first line started and ran on the bottom of the picture frame, the y co-ordinate starts at the 200 pixel mark from the bottom of the image. The line, at 180 pixels long and has no y slope. This creates a spread pair of parallel lines.     &lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimtex27.gif|thumb|right|150px|\picture explained]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this explains the structure of a line, there is a couple of elements that you need to go through to do more with them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Squares and Rectangles==&lt;br /&gt;
Drawing squares and rectangles is similar, but only slightly different. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There should be a square box tool, and there is, but unless it has something inside it, it does not display. It is actually easier to make a square using the \line command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line03.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|This box is constructed using:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}(10,10){\line(230,0)}(240,10){\line(0,230)}(10,240){\line(230,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
It is a 250 pixel square box with a 230 pixel square inside it.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line04.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|This box is different in that is has the equal length indicators that are used in a square.&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}&lt;br /&gt;
(5,120){\line(10,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(10,10){\line(230,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(120,5){\line(0,10)}&lt;br /&gt;
(240,10){\line(0,230)}&lt;br /&gt;
(235,120){\line(10,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(10,240){\line(230,0)}&lt;br /&gt;
(120,235){\line(0,10)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line05.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| The rectangle then becomes the same thing, but with one side shorter. For a portrait canvas it would be:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,230)}(10,10){\line(150,0)}(160,10){\line(0,230)}(10,240){\line(150,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line06.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|The rectangle can also produce a landscape shape:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(250){(10,10){\line(0,160)}(10,10){\line(230,0)}(240,10){\line(0,160)}(10,170){\line(230,0)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Controlling Angles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Controlling angles is a little different. They involve a different perception, but not one that is unfamiliar. Consider this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have a point from which we want to draw a line that is on an angle. The notation used at this point can be positive, positive or positive, negative or negative, positive or negative, negative. Think of it like a number plane or a graph, using directed numbers. The 0,0 point is in the centre, and we have four quadrants around it that give us one of the previously mentioned results.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| rowspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;|[[Image:co-ordquadrants.png|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06a.gif|left]] $$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,45)}}$$, &lt;br /&gt;
a positive x and positive y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06b.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(-40,45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a negative x and positive y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06c.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(-40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a negative x and negative y&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line06d.gif|left]]$$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
a positive x and a negative y&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentially, what these points boil down to is that anything above the insertion point is a positive on the y axis, anything below is a negative. Anything to the left of the insertion point is a negative while everything to the right is a positive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:line06e.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\picture(100){(50,50){\line(40,45)}(50,50){\line(-40,45)}(50,50){\line(-40,-45)}(50,50){\line(40,-45)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The co-ordinate alignment process in TeX is not that good that you can use one set of co-ords as a single starting point for all lines. The layering of each object varies because of the position of the previous object, so each object needs to be exactly placed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This co-ord structure has a great deal of impact on intersecting lines, parallel lines and triangles. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Intersecting Lines==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set up an intersecting pair easily enough, using the \picture control sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex31.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \picture(200){(10,0){\line(150,150)} (0,130){\line(180,-180)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lines that are drawn can be labeled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(200){(10,0){\line(150,150)}(0,130){\line(180,-180)}&lt;br /&gt;
(0,10){A}(0,135){B}(140,0){C}(140,150){D}(62,80){X}} $$ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To produce another image.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:cfmimetex32.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;| To which you may want to ask the question: &lt;br /&gt;
$$The \ \angle \ of \ AXB \ is \ 72\textdegree. \ What \ is \ the \ value \ of \ \angle BXD? $$&lt;br /&gt;
 [[Image: cfmimetex32a.gif|center]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Labeling this image, above-right, turned out to be fairly simple. Offsetting points by a few pixels at the start or end points of the lines proved a successful strategy. The X point proved a little more problematic, and took a number of adjustments before getting it right. Experience here will help.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| With labels the drawing can become a little more like your traditional geometric drawing, but the devil is in the details. The parallel markers need to be placed properly, and that is where experience really comes into it. On lines that are vertical or horizontal, you can get away with using the &amp;gt; or &amp;lt; directly from the keyboard, or the &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gg&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\ll&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  symbols. In either case, you need to position them properly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code:&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(200){(15,45){\line(170,0)} (15,30){c}(170,28){d}(15,160){\line(170,0)}(15,145){e}(180,143){f}(50,20){\line(110,175)}(58,20){a}(140,185){b}(42,32){\kappa}(53,48){\beta}&lt;br /&gt;
(150,165){\kappa}&lt;br /&gt;
(90,38){\gg}(80,153){\gg}&lt;br /&gt;
}$$&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line10.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lines and Arcs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Combining lines and arcs is a serious challenge actually, on a number of levels. For example lets take an arc from the first page on circles.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: cfmimetex21a.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Fairly innocuous of itself, but when we start to add in elements, it changes dramatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \circle(120;90,180) $$&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: line12.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| $$\picture(150){(75,75){\circle(120;90,180)}(75,75){\line(-70,0)}(75,75){\line(0,75)}} $$&lt;br /&gt;
All elements in this drawing start in the same place. Each is layered, and properly placed on the canvas, and using the same co-ord to start makes it easy to control them. No matter the size of the arc, intersecting lines can all be drawn using the centre co-ords of the arc. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Triangles == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of all the drawing objects, it is actually triangles that present the most challenge. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line13.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(350){(10,10){\line(0,320)}(10,330){\line(330,0)}(10,10){\line(330,320)}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|This is a simple triangle, one that allows us to establish a simple set of rules for the sides. The vertical always has an x=0 co-ord and the horizontal always has a y=0 co-ord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case with an x value of 330 on the horizontal, and a y value of 320 on the vertical, the hypotenuse should then have a value of x=340, and the y=330, but not so, they actually have an x=330 and a y=320.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need to add the starting point co-ords to the x and y values of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line14.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
$$picture(350){(10,10){\line(330,0)}(340,10){\line(0,320)}(340,330){\line(-330,-320)}}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This triangle has been developed for a Trigonometry page - but the additional notation should provide insight into how you can use it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:line16.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
| This is a labeled image, but it has an \fbox in it with its little line. With some effort, it could be replaced with two intersecting short lines.&lt;br /&gt;
$$\picture(350,150){(25,25){\line(300,0)}(325,25){\line(0,110)}(25,25){\line(300,110)}(309,25){\fbox{\line(5,5)}}&lt;br /&gt;
(307,98){\theta}(135,75){\beta}(150,5){\alpha}(335,75){\epsilon}}$$ &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| The triangle shows like: &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:trig01.gif|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
|We use the different elements of the triangle to identify those things we need to know about a right-angled triangle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hypotenuse is always the side that is opposite the right angle. The longest side is always the Hypotenuse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To identify the other elements of the triangle we look for the sign &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is the starting point for naming the other sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side that is opposite &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is known as the Opposite. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The side that lies alongside &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; is known as the Adjacent side. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To determine which is which, draw a line that bisects &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\angle \theta&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and whatever line it crosses is the Opposite side. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| The code:&lt;br /&gt;
$$ \picture(350,250){(25,25){\line(300,0)}(25,25){\line(0,220)}(25,245){\line(300,-220)}(310,25){\circle(100;135,180)}(20,100){\line(310,-75)} (25,25){\fbox{\line(5,5)}}(25,25){\line(150,150)}(165,140){Hypotenuse}(120,2){Adjacent}(2,80){\rotatebox{90}{Opposite}}(270,40){\theta}}$$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Matrices=&lt;br /&gt;
A Matrix is a rectangular array of numbers arranged in rows and columns which can be used to organize numeric information. Matrices can be used to predict trends and outcomes in real situations - i.e. polling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
A matrix can be written and displayed like [[Image: matrices03.gif|A matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case the matrix is constructed using the brackets before creating the array:&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ M = \left[\begin{array}{ccc} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
The internal structure of the array is generated by the &amp;amp;, ampersand, and the double backslash.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also create a grid for the matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|A dashed line&lt;br /&gt;
|A solid line&lt;br /&gt;
|A mixed line&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices04.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices05.gif]]	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices06.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c.c.c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c|c|c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ M = \left[\begin{array}&#039;&#039;&#039;{c.c|c}&#039;&#039;&#039; a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hline&#039;&#039;&#039; c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ &#039;&#039;&#039;\hdash&#039;&#039;&#039; e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The command sequences here are the {c|c.c} and \hdash and \hline. The pipe, |, and the full stop determine the line type for the vertical line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matrices also respond to other TeX Notation commands such as size and colour.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
Colour&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|Size&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices07.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices08.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices09.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\blue&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\fs7&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$ 	&lt;br /&gt;
|$$ &#039;&#039;&#039;\fs2&#039;&#039;&#039; M = \left[\begin{array}{c.c.c} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ \hdash c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ \hdash e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating equal and unequal matrices==&lt;br /&gt;
Equal and unequal matrices are simply matrices that either share or not share the same number of rows and columns. To be more precise, equal matrices share the same order and each element in the corresponding positions are equal. Anything else is unequal matrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Actually equal and unequal matrices are constructed along similar lines, but have different shapes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Equal Matrix&lt;br /&gt;
|An unequal matrix&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices10.gif]] 	&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image: matrices11.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \left[\begin{array} a&amp;amp;b&amp;amp;1 \ c&amp;amp;d&amp;amp;2 \ e&amp;amp;f&amp;amp;3\end{array}\right] \ = \ \left[\begin{array} 12&amp;amp;11&amp;amp;z \ 10&amp;amp;9&amp;amp;y \ 8&amp;amp;7&amp;amp;x\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
| $$ \left[\begin{array} a&amp;amp;b \ c&amp;amp;d \ e&amp;amp;f \end{array}\right] \ \neq \ \left[\begin{array} 12&amp;amp;11&amp;amp;z \ 10&amp;amp;9&amp;amp;y \ 8&amp;amp;7&amp;amp;x\end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Labeling a Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Addition and subtraction matrices are similar again, but the presentation is usually very different. The problem comes when trying to mix labels into arrays. The lack of sophistication in the TeX Notation plays against it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle allows an easy adoption of tables to make it work though. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Bill the baker supplies three shops, A, B and C with pies, pasties and sausage rolls. &lt;br /&gt;
  He is expected to determine the stock levels of those three shops in his estimation of supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is better to use the Moodle Fullscreen editor for this, to have a better idea of how the end product will look and to take advantage of the additional tools available. Design decisions need occupy our attention for a while. We need a table of five rows and four columns. The first row is a header row, so the label is centred. The next row needs four columns, a blank cell to start and labels A, B and C. The next three rows are divided into two columns, with the labels, pies, pasties and sausage rolls in each row of the first column and the matrix resides in a merged set of columns there. So first the table:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert Table - initial properties&lt;br /&gt;
| Merge Cells Button&lt;br /&gt;
| Advanced Properties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|  rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[[Image: matricestable01.png|Table properties]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: matricestable02.png | Merge cells]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image: matricestable03.png | Cell properties button]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| You may need to look into the Advanced properties setting of the tables and cells to make this work.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the immediate result: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable04.png | The resulting table]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While not a very good look, it can be made better by tweaking the table using the advanced settings and properties buttons and then you can tweak the matrix itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tweaking the Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable05a.png | A tweaked matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Things are not always as they seem, be aware, the &amp;quot;c&amp;quot; does not stand for &amp;quot;column&amp;quot;, it actually stands for &amp;quot;centre&amp;quot;. The columns are aligned by the letters l, for left, c for centre and r for right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each column is spread across 50 pixels, so the value of 50 is entered into the alignment declaration. The plus sign before the value is used to &amp;quot;propogate&amp;quot; or to force the value across the whole matrix, but is not used when wanting to separate only one column. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the rows is a little more problematic. The capital letter C sets the vertical alignment to the centre, (B is for baseline, but that does not guarantee that the numbers will appear on the base line, and there does not appear to be any third value). The plus sign and following value sets the height of all rows to the number given. In this I have given it a value of 25 pixels for the entire matrix. If there were four or five rows, the same height requirement is made. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order things appear is also important. If you change the order of these settings, they will either not work at all, or will not render as you expect them to. If something does not work properly, then check to make sure you have the right order first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==An Addition Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rule for performing operations on matrices is that they must be equal matrices. For example, addition matrices look like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable06.png | An addition matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
with the results obvious. The code is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  11&amp;amp;14&amp;amp;12 \ \hdash16&amp;amp;12&amp;amp;22 \ \hdash 14&amp;amp;17&amp;amp;15&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] + \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  60&amp;amp;60&amp;amp;60 \ \hdash 40&amp;amp;40&amp;amp;30 \ \hdash 30&amp;amp;30&amp;amp;30&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A Subtraction Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to an addition matrix in its construction, the subtraction matrix is subject to the same rules of equality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the same essential data, we can calculate the daily sales of each of the shops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matricestable07.png | A subtraction matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code is:&lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  72&amp;amp;95&amp;amp;68 \ \hdash 54&amp;amp;61&amp;amp;65 \ \hdash 48&amp;amp;51&amp;amp;60&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] - \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  11&amp;amp;14&amp;amp;12 \ \hdash 16&amp;amp;12&amp;amp;22 \ \hdash 14&amp;amp;17&amp;amp;15&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] = \left[\begin{array}{c+50C+25.c.c}&lt;br /&gt;
  61&amp;amp;81&amp;amp;56 \ \hdash 38&amp;amp;49&amp;amp;43 \ \hdash 34&amp;amp;34&amp;amp;48&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{array}\right] $$  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This code looks more complex than it really is, it is cluttered by the lines and alignment sequences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiplication Matrices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Different than the addition or subtraction matrices, the multiplication matrix comes in three parts, the row matrix, the column matrix and the answer matrix. This implies it has a different construction methodology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matrices16.gif | A multiplication matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And the code for this is: &lt;br /&gt;
  $$ \begin{array} 10&amp;amp;amp;14&amp;amp;amp;16\end{array} \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \left[\begin{array} 45 \\ 61 \\ 19 \end{array}\right] &lt;br /&gt;
  \ = \ \begin{array} 450&amp;amp;amp;854&amp;amp;amp;304\end{array} $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While different, it is not necessarily more complex. For example a problem like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Bill the baker is selling his product to Con the cafe owner, who &lt;br /&gt;
  wants to make sure his overall prices are profitable for himself. &lt;br /&gt;
  Con needs to make sure that his average price is providing sufficient &lt;br /&gt;
  profit to be able to keep the cafes open. Con makes his calculations &lt;br /&gt;
  on a weekly basis, comparing cost to sale prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the pies, pasties and sausage rolls in that order he applies them to the cost and sale price columns :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: matrices17.gif | A multiplication matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The code for this is: &lt;br /&gt;
  $$\left[\begin{array} 350&amp;amp;amp;310&amp;amp;amp;270 \end{array}\right] \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \left[\begin{array} \$2.10&amp;amp;amp;\$3.60 \ \$2.05&amp;amp;amp;\$3.60 \ \$1.90&amp;amp;amp;\$3.10 \end{array} &lt;br /&gt;
  \right] \ = \ \left[\begin{array} \$735.00&amp;amp;amp;\$1260.00 \ \$635.50&amp;amp;amp;\$1116.00 \ &lt;br /&gt;
  \$513.00&amp;amp;amp;$\837.00 \end{array}\right] $$&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See Also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MathJax_filter]] - available in Moodle 2.7 and later&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TeX notation filter]] To turn on the TeX Notation &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Advanced Maths Tools]] Moodle 2.x - The Next Generation of TeX Tools&lt;br /&gt;
* [[DragMath equation editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chemistry notation using mhchem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Mathematics]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit&amp;diff=120264</id>
		<title>Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit&amp;diff=120264"/>
		<updated>2015-10-28T10:35:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Reverted edits by Marycooch (talk) to last revision by Germanvaleroelizondo&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Capabilities}}&lt;br /&gt;
*This allows a user to [[Using tags|edit a tag]] to add a description and related tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default authenticated user role has this capability set to allow&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability may only be applied in the system context i.e. as a system role&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Capabilities|Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ケイパビリティ/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit&amp;diff=120263</id>
		<title>Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit&amp;diff=120263"/>
		<updated>2015-10-28T10:32:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: not set auth user&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Capabilities}}&lt;br /&gt;
*This allows a user to [[Using tags|edit a tag]] to add a description and related tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability is Not set by default for the role of authenticated user.&lt;br /&gt;
* This capability may only be applied in the system context i.e. as a system role&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Capabilities|Tag]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ケイパビリティ/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Capabilities/moodle/tag:edit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Question_types&amp;diff=120248</id>
		<title>Question types</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Question_types&amp;diff=120248"/>
		<updated>2015-10-26T09:29:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Standard question types */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}You may add a variety of different types of questions in the Quiz and Lesson modules.  This page is about [[Quiz module]] question types; some will be similar  to [[Lesson questions]] types, which are fewer in number and function differently. The standard quiz question types are listed below with brief descriptions. &#039;&#039;&#039;Please use the links on the right side of this page to find more detailed information about standard questions types.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Changing the order of the question types==&lt;br /&gt;
The administrator can specify the order the question types appear in the question chooser so that teachers are presented with the most common ones at the top. This is done from &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Question types &amp;gt; Manage question types.&#039;&#039; The administrator uses the arrows to reorder the question types and the teacher will then see their favourites first when creating a new question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:commonquestions.png|thumb|400px|center|Most common question types first]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Standard question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Calculated ===&lt;br /&gt;
Calculated questions offer a way to create individual numerical questions by the use of wildcards that are substituted with individual values when the quiz is taken. [[Calculated_question_type|More on the Calculated question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculated multi-choice===&lt;br /&gt;
Calculated multichoice questions are like multichoice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...} i.e if you calculate the surface of a rectangle {={l}*{w}}. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Calculated_multichoice_question_type More on the Calculated Multi-Choice question type.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Calculated simple===&lt;br /&gt;
Simple calculated questions offer a way to create individual numerical questions whose response is the result of a numerical formula which contain variable numerical values by the use of wildcards (i.e {x} , {y}) that are substituted with random values when the quiz is taken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The simple calculated questions offers the most used features of the calculated question with a much simpler creation interface. [https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/Simple_calculated_question_type More on the Simple Calculated Question type.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description ===&lt;br /&gt;
This question type is not actually a question. It just prints some text (and possibly graphics) without requiring an answer. This can be used to provide some information to be used by a subsequent group of questions, for example. [[Description_question_type|More on the Description question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Essay ===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows students to write at length on a particular subject and must be manually graded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible for a teacher to create a template to scaffold the student&#039;s answer in order to give them extra support. The template is then reproduced in the text editor when the student starts to answer the question. See  Youtube video [http://youtu.be/BAZa66WvyWQ Essay scaffold with the Moodle quiz] It is also possible to include grading information for teachers marking the essay to refer to as they assess the essays,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:responsetemplategraderinfo.png|thumb|400px|Response template and grader info set up]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:quizessaytemplate.png|thumb|400px|What the student sees]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:teacherviewessayq.png|thumb|400px|What the teacher sees]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
A list of sub-questions is provided, along with a list of answers. The respondent must &amp;quot;match&amp;quot; the correct answers with each question. [[Matching_question_type|More on the Matching question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Embedded Answers ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cloze_test Cloze Test] / Gap Fill) ===&lt;br /&gt;
These very flexible questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers. [[Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type|More on the Embedded Answers question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple choice ===&lt;br /&gt;
With the [[Multiple Choice question type]] you can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Short Answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
In response to a question (that may include an image), the respondent types a word or phrase. There may several possible correct answers, with different grades. Answers may or may not be sensitive to case. [[Short-Answer_question_type|More on the Short Answer question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Numerical ===&lt;br /&gt;
From the student perspective, a numerical question looks just like a short-answer question. The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. [[Numerical_question_type|More on the Numerical question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Random short-answer matching===&lt;br /&gt;
From the student perspective, this looks just like a Matching question. The difference is that the sub-questions are drawn randomly from Short Answer questions in the current category. [[Random_Short-Answer_Matching_question_type|More on the Random Short-Answer Matching question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== True/False ===&lt;br /&gt;
In response to a question (that may include an image), the respondent selects from two options: True or False. [[True/False_question_type|More on the True/False question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Third-party question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Besides the standard question types that are part of the core Moodle distribution, there are a number of [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 question type add-ons] in [https://moodle.org/plugins the add-ons database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of those add-ons have additional documentation in [[Third-party_question_types|Third-party question types]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson questions]] &lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_qpractice Question practice] additional activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ca:Tipus_de_preguntes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipos de preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-motak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Types de questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題タイプ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File:commonquestions.png&amp;diff=120247</id>
		<title>File:commonquestions.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=File:commonquestions.png&amp;diff=120247"/>
		<updated>2015-10-26T09:28:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Guide_for_new_administrators&amp;diff=120210</id>
		<title>Talk:Guide for new administrators</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Talk:Guide_for_new_administrators&amp;diff=120210"/>
		<updated>2015-10-13T15:16:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This is very nicely done. I am sure that there are things that can be tweaked but I think it hits all the important bases really well for beginning moodle admins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--[[User:Mark Pearson 2|Mark Pearson 2]] ([[User talk:Mark Pearson 2|talk]]) 22:56, 13 October 2015 (AWST)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reply==&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks for the comment- as it is a wiki, people are welcome to suggest improvements or tweaks :) --[[User:Mary Cooch|Mary Cooch]] ([[User talk:Mary Cooch|talk]]) 23:16, 13 October 2015 (AWST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_status_block&amp;diff=120179</id>
		<title>Course completion status block</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Course_completion_status_block&amp;diff=120179"/>
		<updated>2015-10-08T07:09:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Teacher view of Course completion status block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Blocks}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying the status of course completion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course completion status block shows what has been done towards [[Course completion|completing the course]].   The student and teacher will both see this block. The &amp;quot;More information&amp;quot; link will lead to a more detailed report.  This report can have some interactive elements in the form of check boxes for the student and teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Student view of Course completion status block==&lt;br /&gt;
The student can see their progress in the course by looking at the content of the block or clicking on the &amp;quot;More details&amp;quot; link to see a report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student, if required, can mark an activity as completed on the course&#039;s homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=250&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:CompletionBlock_Complete_Student.jpg|Course completion status block, student view&lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion report student 01.PNG|Course completion report, student view, 1 course &lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion report student 02.png|Course completion report, student view, 2 courses - teacher needs to mark complete&lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion course homepage student view.png|Course homepage, students  has completed lesson, needs to self complete quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Teacher view of Course completion status block==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This block shows the status for each student.  It is also the place where the teacher (or others) can mark the course as complete.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The course completion status block will only appear if completion tracking criteria are set in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Completion tracking&#039;&#039;. This is what the teacher sees:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery &amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion status block teacher.PNG|Course completion status block, teacher view, 1 course&lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion report teacher 01.PNG|Course completion report, teacher view,  1 course&lt;br /&gt;
File:Course completion report teacher 2.png|Course completion report, teacher view,  showing prerequisite&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one capability: [[Capabilities/moodle/course:isincompletionreports| Be shown on completion reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Course completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Completion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaro-osaketaren_egoera_blokea]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kursbearbeitungsstatus-Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Bloque de status de finalización del curso]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Statistics&amp;diff=120147</id>
		<title>Statistics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Statistics&amp;diff=120147"/>
		<updated>2015-10-06T15:00:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Statistics not working? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Course reports}}&lt;br /&gt;
If statistics are enabled for the site, graphs and tables of user activity may be generated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Statistics.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics graphs and tables show how many &#039;&#039;&#039;hits&#039;&#039;&#039; there have been on various parts of your site during various time frames. They &#039;&#039;&#039;do not&#039;&#039;&#039; show how many distinct users there have been. They are processed daily at a time you specify. You must enable statistics before you will see anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling statistics==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Statistics must be enabled by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.4.2 onwards, once statistics have been  enabled, the screen to configure them becomes visible as a link in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Statistics&#039;&#039;. (In older versions the link was always available irrespective of whether statistics was enabled.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Course overview report will also then be accessible from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Reports&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Various settings for statistics may be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Statistics&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As stats processing is quite resource intensive, it is recommended that you should set the stats processing to start in the early morning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Set the stats processing to start an hour before your automated course backups are scheduled to start, then set the maximum runtime to 1 hour. This ensures that stats are not being processed at the same time as course backups are being made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Statistics not working?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If statistics isn&#039;t working and you have checked all the obvious (such as whether it&#039;s enabled), check &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules&#039;&#039; for any old hidden modules in the database which miss the files in the &#039;&#039;moodle/mod&#039;&#039; folder on your server. If you find any, they should be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also try limiting the length of time logs are kept for to reduce the size of the tables. Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Logging &amp;gt; Standard log&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run stats manually, go to the database, go to the mdl_config table and set statslastdaily, statslastweekly and statslastmonthly to 0 (leave statslastmonthly alone if you think it might be large logtables causing the problem). Then go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Scheduled tasks&#039;&#039; and look for the task &amp;quot;Background processing for statistics&amp;quot;; set this to be a minute or two into the future by adjusting the hour and minute values. If you manually run cron, you should see output there showing that stats are processing, but be patient if it appears to hang - this can take between 5 mins and several hours depending on how big your site is, so just leave it going. Afterwards, you might want to return the Scheduled task&#039;s values back to asterisks so that it returns to the defined schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Viewing statistics==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A manager, teacher or non-editing teacher (or any other user with the capability [[Capabilities/report/stats:view|report/stats:view]]) can view statistics for their course in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Statistics&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can view statistics for the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Statistics&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Statistiken]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Estadísticas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Statistiques]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_marker_question_type&amp;diff=120077</id>
		<title>Drag and drop marker question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_marker_question_type&amp;diff=120077"/>
		<updated>2015-10-04T15:41:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
This page is about the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?id=234 drag and drop marker question type], which is a question type allowing students to drop markers onto an area on a background image. Drag and drop marker questions differ from [[Drag and drop onto image question type]] in that there are no predefined areas on the underlying image that are visible to the student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create a question==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the question a descriptive name to help you find it in the question bank. (Students won&#039;t see the name.) In our example, students must correctly locate regions of Australia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the question to the text editor, using any formatting you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; section, click the background image button to upload an image. Larger images will be displayed at a maxiumum 600 x 400.Your image will then display under the file upload box. Note that gridlines are visible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdropmarkerimageupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Markers&#039;&#039;&#039; section, add the words you want the students to drag onto the areas you select. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ddmarkerswords.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In  the &#039;Number&#039; dropdown, you can select the number of times the marker can be used. Selecting 1 means that when it has been used once, it will no longer be available in the list. It is fine to leave the numbers as the default &#039;Infinite&#039;; it just means that each marker will still remain once it has been used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dropzones&#039;&#039;&#039; section, decide the shape you want the selectable areas to be:circle, polygon or rectangle. Our example uses a rectangle. In each &#039;Marker&#039; dropdown, choose the item you want for that area. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see by your uploaded image that these names are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ddmarkersimageandwords.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you need manually to add the coordinates of the areas into which you want students to position the marker. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the question mark icon [[File:helppopup.png]] next to Drop zone 1 to see how to add these for your chosen shape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our example uses a rectangle. We need to define four numbers:&lt;br /&gt;
# the top left corner of our selected area, by counting the boxes in from the left...&lt;br /&gt;
#and down from the top. Each box is ten pixels so three boxes = 300 for example. &lt;br /&gt;
#the width of our selected area, by counting the boxes across&lt;br /&gt;
#the height of our selected area, by counting the boxes up&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The  numbers are separated by commas, with a semi-colon separating the corner coordinates from the size, eg: 20,50:150,200&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ddcoordinatesexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image updates immediately so you can check your accuracy and adapt the coordinates. The above co-ordinates preview as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ddcoordinates.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all co-ordinates have been manually entered, you can  save the changes and preview the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IMPORTANT NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; When dragging a marker, students must position the little circle top left of the marker in the centre of the area they have selected, &#039;&#039;not the whole marker&#039;&#039;, as this might cause confusion and an unexpected incorrect answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ddexamplepositioning1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using markers and drop zones more than once===&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;Infinite&#039; is selected from the &#039;Numbers&#039; dropdown in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Markers&#039;&#039;&#039; section, then the markers may be used more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the same coordinates must used for several markers in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Drop zones&#039;&#039;&#039; section, then more than one marker may be placed in a single area, as in the example below (1) , where students identify regions of Great Britain, the UK and the British Isles (2):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:partsofGBUKBI.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Accessibility==&lt;br /&gt;
Marker questions are keyboard accessible. Use the &amp;lt;tab&amp;gt; key to move between the markers and the &amp;lt;arrow&amp;gt; keys to position the markers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scoring and feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
All drop zones are weighted identically. Only drop zones that are correctly labelled gain marks. There is no negative marking of drop zones that are incorrectly labelled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If more markers are placed on the image than there are drop-zones a penalty is applied for the extra markers. If there are n drop zones and n+m markers are placed of which p are placed correctly the score is calculated as p/(m+n).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the question is used in &#039;interactive with multiple tries&#039; style the marking is modified as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The mark is reduced for each try by the penalty factor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Allowance is made for when a correct choice is first chosen providing it remains chosen in subsequent tries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show the number of correct responses:&#039;&#039;&#039; Include in the feedback a statement of how many choices are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;State which markers are incorrectly placed:&#039;&#039;&#039; Include in the feedback a list of markers which are incorrectly placed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Move incorrectly placed markers back to default start position below image:&#039;&#039;&#039; When ‘Try again’ is clicked incorrectly positioned labels are removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/course/view.php?id=1581 documentation is available] in the [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/mod/oucontent/view.php?id=52747 Open University&#039;s reference manual].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=set&amp;amp;id=10 Other Moodle plugins from the Open University]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 Other third-party question type plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://labspace.open.ac.uk/course/view.php?id=3484 eAssessment at the Open University with open source software]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/02/20/review-question-type-drag-and-drop-marker-for-moodle-2/ Review of this question type]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Tvl4GuGvtxc Video tutorial: How to Create a Question Using the Drag and Drop with Markers Question Type]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Open University]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta arrastrar y soltar marcador]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=question/type/ddmarker&amp;diff=120076</id>
		<title>question/type/ddmarker</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=question/type/ddmarker&amp;diff=120076"/>
		<updated>2015-10-04T15:40:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: redirecting&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Drag and drop marker question type]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text&amp;diff=120020</id>
		<title>Drag and drop into text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text&amp;diff=120020"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:05:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Redirected page to Drag and drop into text question type&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Drag and drop into text question type]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=question/type/ddwtos&amp;diff=120019</id>
		<title>question/type/ddwtos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=question/type/ddwtos&amp;diff=120019"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:04:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: redirecting&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Drag and drop into text question type]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Third-party_question_types&amp;diff=120018</id>
		<title>Third-party question types</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Third-party_question_types&amp;diff=120018"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:03:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
Besides the standard [[Question types]] that are part of the core Moodle distribution, there are a number of [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 additional question type plugins] in [https://moodle.org/plugins the plugins database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of those additional question types have their documentation links below. There are many question types available for assessing the knowledge of [[:Category:Chemistry|chemistry]], [[:Category:Mathematics|maths]], [[:Category:Music|music]] and [[:Category:Programming|computer programming]], but as more new additional plugins are continuously being developed, this list might be outdated. The Supported Moodle versions listed here were those available at the time this documentation page was made and might have been updated (or not):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[2D/3D structure display short answer]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Algebra question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Calculated Objects question type]] (Moodle 2.0 to 2.3)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cloze editor module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Combined question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Concept map question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Correct writing question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop into text question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop marker question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop matching question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop onto image question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop organic chemestry nomenclature question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Electron pushing / curved question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Fischer projections question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Formulas question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Freehand drawing question type]] (Moodle 2.5 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Gapfill question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Java Molecular Editor question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Javaunittest question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lewis structures]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Matrix question type]] (Moodle 2.2 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multinumerical question type]] (Moodle 2.0 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music interval question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music key signature question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music scale question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music theory question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Name to structure or reaction question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Newman projections question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Opaque question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ordering question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OU multiple response question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pattern-match question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pattern-match with JME question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Perl-compatible regular expression question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[POAS abstract question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PoodLL recording question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Preg question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Regular Expression Short-Answer question type]] (Moodle 2.2 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reverse pattern match question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Select atoms or molecules question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Select missing words question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set splitting question type]] (Moodle 2.2 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spreadsheet question type]] (Moodle 2.1 to 2.5 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[STACK question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Structure match with editor question type]] (Moodle 2.4 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric set question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric set with units question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vertical matching question type]] (Moodle 2.2 to 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[WIRIS math &amp;amp; science questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_qpractice Question practice] additional activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Preguntas de terceros]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Third-party_question_types&amp;diff=120017</id>
		<title>Third-party question types</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Third-party_question_types&amp;diff=120017"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:03:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
Besides the standard [[Question types]] that are part of the core Moodle distribution, there are a number of [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 additional question type plugins] in [https://moodle.org/plugins the plugins database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of those additional question types have their documentation links below. There are many question types available for assessing the knowledge of [[:Category:Chemistry|chemistry]], [[:Category:Mathematics|maths]], [[:Category:Music|music]] and [[:Category:Programming|computer programming]], but as more new additional plugins are continuously being developed, this list might be outdated. The Supported Moodle versions listed here were those available at the time this documentation page was made and might have been updated (or not):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[2D/3D structure display short answer]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Algebra question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Calculated Objects question type]] (Moodle 2.0 to 2.3)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cloze editor module]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Combined question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Concept map question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Correct writing question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop into text] question type]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop marker question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop matching question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop onto image question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Drag and drop organic chemestry nomenclature question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Electron pushing / curved question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Fischer projections question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Formulas question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Freehand drawing question type]] (Moodle 2.5 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Gapfill question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Java Molecular Editor question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Javaunittest question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lewis structures]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Matrix question type]] (Moodle 2.2 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multinumerical question type]] (Moodle 2.0 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music interval question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music key signature question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music scale question type]] (Moodle 2.3 and 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Music theory question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Name to structure or reaction question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.7)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Newman projections question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Opaque question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Ordering question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[OU multiple response question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pattern-match question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Pattern-match with JME question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Perl-compatible regular expression question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[POAS abstract question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PoodLL recording question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Preg question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Regular Expression Short-Answer question type]] (Moodle 2.2 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reverse pattern match question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Select atoms or molecules question type]] (Moodle 2.3 to 2.6)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Select missing words question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Set splitting question type]] (Moodle 2.2 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Spreadsheet question type]] (Moodle 2.1 to 2.5 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[STACK question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Structure match with editor question type]] (Moodle 2.4 to 2.7 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric set question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Variable numeric set with units question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vertical matching question type]] (Moodle 2.2 to 2.4 only)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[WIRIS math &amp;amp; science questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_qpractice Question practice] additional activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Preguntas de terceros]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text_question_type&amp;diff=120016</id>
		<title>Drag and drop into text question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text_question_type&amp;diff=120016"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:02:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: added to this page for consistency with other pages&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}A drag and drop question type where missing words have to be dragged into gaps in a paragraph of text.&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle versions available==&lt;br /&gt;
This question type is available for Moodle 2.1 to 2.9 from the [https://moodle.org/plugins/pluginversions.php?plugin=qtype_ddwtos Moodle plugins database].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create a question==&lt;br /&gt;
*Give the question a descriptive name to help you find it in the question bank. (Students won&#039;t see the name.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the question to the text editor, using any formatting you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use double square brackets wo sets of square brackets &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;[[n]]&#039;  &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;  with a number in place of the word you wish the students to find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdroptextquestion.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the missing words or phrases in the correctly numbered boxes in the &#039;Choice&#039; section. (You may add extra ones to make the question harder. If you tick &#039;Shuffle&#039; the display order will be shuffled:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdroptextchoices.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Limited formatting of text using &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt; &amp;lt;sub&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;em&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Groups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Choices that are within the same Group are colour coded and may only be dropped in a gap with the corresponding colour. Choices that are marked as &#039;infinite&#039; may be used in multiple locations.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the example below, Group 1 are verbs and Group 2 are possessive adjectives:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdroptextgroupchoice.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
*The students see Group 1 as white boxes and Group 2 as grey boxes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragdroptextgroupdisplay.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to have drag boxes containing multiple lines. If you want to drag long sentences - don&#039;t. Give each a label and drag the label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Accessibility===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop questions are keyboard accessible. Use the &amp;lt;tab&amp;gt; key to move between the gaps and the &amp;lt;space&amp;gt; key to cycle around the possible choices for each gap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scoring and Feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All gaps are weighted identically. Only gaps that are filled correctly gain marks. There is no negative marking of gaps that are filled incorrectly. The scoring and feedback systems are similar to standard question types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there a wildcard for blanks to be empty?===&lt;br /&gt;
The only way to do this is to make a drag item that looks empty, and make students drag that into the boxes that should be empty. As the code ignores drag items that comprise only spaces, you will need to try to use something like a non-breaking space (easy to do with 1 click in the [[TinyMCE_editor]], or type &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; in other [[Text editor]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/mod/oucontent/view.php?id=52747&amp;amp;section=2.3.1 original page]] at the O U site.&lt;br /&gt;
* More [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/course/view.php?id=1581 documentation is available] in the [http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/mod/oucontent/view.php?id=52747 Open University&#039;s reference manual].&lt;br /&gt;
* Nice YouTube video clip: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ohoTEfiNGA4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=set&amp;amp;id=10 Other Moodle plugins from the Open University]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=29 Other third-party question type plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://labspace.open.ac.uk/course/view.php?id=3484 eAssessment at the Open University with open source software]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Open University]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:question/type/ddwtos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta arrastrar y soltar al texto]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text_question_type&amp;diff=120015</id>
		<title>Drag and drop into text question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/29/en/index.php?title=Drag_and_drop_into_text_question_type&amp;diff=120015"/>
		<updated>2015-10-02T12:01:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Created page with &amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>